Yamaha RX-V100D de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V100D
Printed in Malaysia WG22480
RX-V100D
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
G
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,
20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of
this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may
fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to
liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,
do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall
and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power
cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a
wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC
power plug can be reached easily.
For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K. Model
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
1
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display .................................................... 8
Rear panel ................................................................ 10
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11
Speaker placement ................................................... 11
Speaker connections ................................................ 12
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 14
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO
COMPONENTS ............................................... 15
Before connecting components................................ 15
Connecting video components................................. 16
Connecting audio components................................. 19
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20
Connecting the DAB antenna .................................. 21
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 21
Turning on the power............................................... 21
BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 22
Using the BASIC SETUP menu .............................. 22
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 25
Basic operations....................................................... 25
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 27
Selecting input modes.............................................. 31
FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 33
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 33
Presetting stations .................................................... 34
Selecting preset stations........................................... 36
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37
Receiving Radio Data System stations .................... 38
Changing the Radio Data System mode .................. 39
PTY SEEK function ................................................ 40
EON function........................................................... 41
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)... 42
About DAB.............................................................. 42
DAB tuning.............................................................. 43
PRESET MEMORY ................................................ 44
DAB service information......................................... 46
Accessing DAB MENU........................................... 47
INIT SCAN.............................................................. 47
TUNE AID............................................................... 48
Dynamic Range Control .......................................... 49
PRUNE LIST........................................................... 50
PRESET DELETE................................................... 50
RECORDING ....................................................... 51
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS.........................52
For movie/video sources.......................................... 52
For music sources .................................................... 54
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................55
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 55
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 56
SET MENU ............................................................57
Using SET MENU ................................................... 58
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 59
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 61
3 DAB MENU ......................................................... 62
4 OPTION MENU................................................... 63
ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................64
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................66
Control area ............................................................. 66
Setting remote control codes ................................... 67
Controlling other components ................................. 68
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......69
What is a sound field ............................................... 69
Changing parameter settings ................................... 69
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................71
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................73
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........78
GLOSSARY...........................................................79
Audio formats .......................................................... 79
Sound field programs............................................... 80
Audio information ................................................... 80
Video signal information ......................................... 81
DAB Frequency Table............................................. 82
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................83
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 )
Front: 85 W + 85 W
Center: 85 W
Surround: 85 W + 85 W
Surround back: 85 W
Sound field features
Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
40-station random and direct preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting reception)
DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) information display
Locate all DAB services in your area using INIT SCAN
Optimize DAB reception using TUNE AID
Other features
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
A SET MENU that provides you with items for
optimizing this unit for your audio/video system
6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
S-video signal input/output capability
Component video input/output capability
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
Sleep timer
Cinema and music night listening modes
Remote control with preset remote control codes
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
English
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert two supplied batteries (AA, R06, UM-3)
according to the polarity markings (+ / –) on
the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
ENTER
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
SRCH MODE
MEMORY
Remote control Batteries x2
(AA, R06, UM-3)
AM loop antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model only)
Indoor FM antenna
Indoor DAB antenna
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT *
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
the unit is in FM/AM tuner mode.
Switches to the top of the service list when the unit is in
DAB tuner mode.
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is
not in tuner mode.
5 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL –/+ *
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is
displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display when the unit is in FM/AM tuner mode. Selects
the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.
Browses through the list of stored or preset services when
this unit is in DAB tuner mode.
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.
6 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) (DISPLAY) *
Switches between automatic tuning (AUTO indicator on)
and manual tuning (AUTO indicator off) when this unit is
in FM/AM tuner mode.
Displays various service information of the current
broadcast when this unit is in DAB tuner mode (see
page 46).
8 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
DABSEARCH MODE
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
DISPLAY
213456
FGHDCA0B E
I
7
8
9
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
INTRODUCTION
English
9 PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
0 SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
A PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)* SERCH MODE
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers
and tuning when this unit is in FM/AM tuner mode.
Switches between the AUTO and PRESET tuning
methods when this unit is in DAB tuner mode.
B STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
C FM/AM, DAB
Switches the reception band between FM, AM, or DAB
when the unit is in tuner mode.
D PROGRAM l / h
Use to select sound field programs (see page 26).
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right speakers (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
E TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right speakers (see page 26).
F INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 31).
G INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
H MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
I VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
* Used when the unit is in DAB reception mode (see page 42).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 66.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control function.
3 Radio Data System tuning buttons
FREQ/TEXT
Press this button when the unit is receiving a Radio Data
System station to cycle the display between the PS mode,
PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those
Radio Data System data services) and/or the frequency
display (see page 39).
PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode
(see page 40).
PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode (see page 40).
EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see
page 41).
4 Sound field program/numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the
unit is in tuner mode.
Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in surround
(see page 29).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1-channel
playback of multi-channel sources (see page 28).
Use DIRECT ST. to playback 2-channel sources in high
fidelity sound (see page 30).
5 SPEAKERS A/B
Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to
the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
6 LEVEL (BAND)
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
Switches the reception band between FM, AM, and DAB
when the unit is in tuner mode.
7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / ENTER
Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or
SET MENU items.
Press i to select a preset station group (A to E) when the
unit is in tuner mode.
Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)
when the unit is in tuner mode.
Remote control
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
ENTER
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
SRCH MODE
MEMORY
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
1
2
4
5
7
6
8
H
3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
INTRODUCTION
English
8 RETURN (MEMORY)
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
SET MENU parameters.
9 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
0 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
A SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 55).
B MULTI CH IN
Selects multi-channel input when using an external
decoder (etc.).
C CODE SET
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 67).
D AMP
Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to
control the main unit.
E VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
F MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
G STRAIGHT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
H NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 30).
I SET MENU (MENU)
Activates the SET MENU function (see page 57).
J DISPLAY
Displays various service information of the current
broadcast when this unit is in DAB tuner mode (see
page 46).
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote control
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
places of high humidity, such as near a bath
high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
extremely low temperatures
dusty places
Using the remote control
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
MAIN ZONE 2
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
30 30
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
ENTER
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
Approximately 6 m
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 STANDARD indicator
Lights up when Surround Standard or Surround Enhanced
is selected (see page 29).
3 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 26).
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
5 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
6 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
7 PRESET indicator
Lights up when a preset station is selected.
8 AUTO indicator
Lights up to indicate that automatic tuning is possible.
9 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
0 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
A MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored.
B MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
C VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
D PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
E SECONDARY indicator
Lights up when a secondary signal is selected.
F DAB indicator
Lights up when Digital Audio Broadcasting mode is
selected.
G NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
H SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected.
I Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
J HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
K DRC indicator
Lights up when this unit is set to DRC MODE: AUTO:
and DRC (Dynamic Range Control) data is transmitted in
the DAB tuner mode.
L Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
Front panel display
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VIRTUAL
VCR
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
q
PL
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
DAB
STANDARD
AUTO
PS PTY RT CT EON
PTY HOLD
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
PCM
q
PL x
A B
SP
mS
dB
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
DUAL
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
SECONDARY
DRC
PRESET
1345689ABC0
GH
M
IK
LQPROFED
2
J
N
7
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
English
M Radio Data System indicators
The name(s) of the Radio Data System data offered by the
currently received Radio Data System station light(s) up.
EON lights up when an Radio Data System station that
offers the EON data service is being received.
PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the
PTY SEEK mode.
N SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
O 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
P DUAL indicator
Lights up when a dual monaural signal is input to this unit.
Q LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
R Input channel indicators/speaker indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Indicate the number of speakers connected in SPEAKERS
(page 23), or indicate the channel being adjusted in SP
LEVEL (page 60).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
Used when making a MD or CD recording.
See page 19 for connection information.
2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.
4 DAB antenna terminal
See page 21 for connection information.
5 AC OUTLETS
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 21).
6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.
7 Audio component jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
8 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 13 for connection information.
9 Antenna terminals
See page 20 for connection information.
0 Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
Rear panel
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
R
R
L
L
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULTI CH INPUT
OUTPUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
/CBL
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
MD
/CD-R
CD
OUT
VCR
VIDEO
IN
FRONT
SURROUND
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DTV
/CBL
P
B
Y
+
+
A
B
FM
ANT
SUB
WOOFER
S VIDEO
R
L
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
75W UNBAL.
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
CD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
DAB
+
+
+
+
+
+
12 3 5
6
4
78 9
0
SPEAKER SETUP
11
PREPARATION
English
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP
and multi-channel audio sources.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union)
.
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is used for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close
to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under
it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m
12
SPEAKER SETUP
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
If you use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to
4 ohms before using (see page 14).
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or
do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable. Twist the
exposed wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
2 Unscrew the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
13
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
English
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems (2, 3) to these
terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it
to the FRONT A or B terminals.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (4) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (6, 7) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, to this jack.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker (5) to these terminals.
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
R
R
L
L
OUTPUT
+
+
+
+++
+
+
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
DAB
DAB
DVD
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
2 3 6 71
54
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speaker
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
Speaker layout
14
SPEAKER SETUP
If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power.
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 While this unit is in standby mode, hold
down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press
STANDBY/ON.
This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP
menu appears in the front panel display.
2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu
and select “SP IMP.”.
3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to
select “4 MIN”.
4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
This unit is switched back to standby mode. The setting
you made is reflected the next time this unit’s power is
turned on.
Speaker impedance setting
CAUTION
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
1,3 2
1,4
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down, press
PROGRAM
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
15
PREPARATION
English
Do not connect this unit or other components to the main
power until all connections between components are
complete.
Cable indications
Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.
Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the
left jacks.
Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
L
R
C
Y
P
B
PR
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
S-video cables
component video cables
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
16
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
Connections for DVD playback
Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you
connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO
connections.
Connecting video components
Note
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
R
L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
PB
Y
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
LR
O
S
P
R PB Y
V
DVD player
Video
monitor
Optical out
Video out
Audio out
Video in
17
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
PREPARATION
English
Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.
Notes
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT
SURROUND
R
L
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
LRLR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
18
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
Connections for other video components
Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you
connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the
VIDEO connection.
When recording, you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component.
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or video camera, to this unit.
Notes
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
DTV/
CBL
VIDEO
R
L
OUT
VCR
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/
CBL
PB
Y
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
O
LR
LR LR
V
S
P
R PB Y
S
V
S
V
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Video out
Video inAudio in
Video in
Video
monitor
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
V
L
R
Game
console or
video camera
Video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
19
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
PREPARATION
English
Connections for audio components
Connecting audio components
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
CD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
O
L
R
LR
LR
C
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
Coaxial out
Audio out
Audio inAudio out
MD or
CD recorder
20
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert
the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna
for the best reception.
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
Connecting the 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter (U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4 Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
5 Snap the cover into place.
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
75 UNBAL.
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna
GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
11
8
6
Unit:
mm
Lead wire
Clamp
Clamp
Insert wire
into slot
21
CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS
PREPARATION
English
The DAB (Digital Audio Broadcast) wire antenna is
included with this unit. In general, this wire should
provide sufficient signal strength. Simply connect the wire
antenna to the DAB antenna terminal and attach the wire
antenna vertically in an unobtrusive location.
It is recommended that you use TUNE AID (see page 48)
when setting up the indoor DAB antenna in order to
maximize DAB reception ability.
Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area – not all areas
are presently covered. For a list of country DAB statuses and
worldwide DAB frequencies, you can check WorldDAB online
at http://www.worlddab.org.
If the DAB signal is weak, use a commercially available
outdoor DAB antenna for better reception.
Connecting the AC power cord
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. model ..............................................................1 outlet
Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)
supply power to any connected component whenever this
unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power
(total power consumption of components), see
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 83.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power of this unit.
Connecting the DAB antenna
Notes
DAB
DAB
DAB
Indoor DAB antenna
(included)
Connecting the power supply cord
Turning on the power
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
SYSTEM POWER
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
or
Front panel Remote control
BASIC SETUP
22
The basic setup feature is a useful way to set up your
system quickly and with minimal effort.
y
If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise
adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU
(page 59) instead of using BASIC SETUP.
Initial settings are indicated in bold for each parameter.
Before you begin:
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or press
AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS
A or B on the remote control) to select the front
speakers you want to use.
Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this
unit.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press ENTER to enter BASIC SETUP.
The ROOM parameter appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
ROOM: S M >L
Select the size of the room you have installed your
speakers in. In general, the room sizes are defined as
follows:
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
2
5 Press d to display the SUBWOOFER
parameter.
6 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
YES If you have a subwoofer in your system.
NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.
BASIC SETUP
Using the BASIC SETUP menu
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
2,15
3-14
1
AMP
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
BASIC SETUP
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
SUBWOOFER
..
YES
23
BASIC SETUP
PREPARATION
English
7 Press d to display the SPEAKERS
parameter.
8 Press j / i to select the number of speakers
you connected.
9 Press d to display SET/CANCEL.
10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
>SET CANCEL
SET To apply the settings you chose in steps
4 through 8.
CANCEL To cancel the setup without making
any changes.
11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected SET, you hear a test tone from each
speaker in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears in
the front panel display for a few seconds, then
“CHECK: OK?”.
CHECK:TestTone
CHECK: OK? YES
12 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
CHECK: OK? YES
YES To complete the setup process if the test tone
levels from each speaker were satisfactory.
NO To proceed to the SPEAKER LEVEL speaker
level adjustment menu to balance the level of
each speaker.
13 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected NO in step 12, the front speaker level
adjustment display appears in the front panel display.
Choices Display Speakers
2spk
Front L/R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
6spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
SPEAKERS
..
6spk
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL CR
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB
SB
SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
24
BASIC SETUP
To balance the speaker levels
Perform the following steps after step 13 (see page 23).
The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker
and the left front (or left surround) speaker in turn. The
indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone
flashes in the front panel display.
14 Press d / u to select a speaker, then use j / i
to adjust the balance.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
FR ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the front left and right
speakers.
C ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the front left and center
speakers.
SL ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the front left and
surround left speakers.
SB ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the surround left and
surround back speakers.
SR ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the surround left and
surround right speakers.
SWFR ----||----
Adjusts the balance between the front left speaker
and the subwoofer.
15 Press SET MENU to exit after balancing the
speakers.
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
L C R
SL SR
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
RUNNING H/F 1
25
BASIC
OPERATION
English
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to
select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS
A or B on the remote control).
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
4 Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display for a few seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operating instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
7 4
3
61
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AMP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLU ME
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MODE PTY SEEK
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
7
6
1
4
3,7
3
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
Front panel Remote control
or
SPEAKERS
BA
09
AB
SPEAKERS
AMP
Front panel Remote control
or
INPUT
CODE SET
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
Front panel
Remote control
or
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Remote control
Front panel
26
PLAYBACK
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP
mode, then press one of the sound field program
buttons on the remote control) to select a sound field
program. (See page 52 for details about sound field
programs.)
To listen with headphones
(“SILENT CINEMA”)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
“SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when the Direct Stereo or
2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the tonal quality
of your front left and right
speakers or headphones (when
connected).
Press TONE CONTROL on the
front panel repeatedly to select
TREBLE or BASS, then rotate
PROGRAM to increase or
decrease.
Select TREBLE to adjust the
high frequency response.
Select BASS to adjust the
low frequency response.
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.
TONE CONTROL is not effective with the Direct Stereo
program (page 30) or MULTI CH INPUT.
When TC BYPASS is set to AUTO (page 61), and BASS and
TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses
this unit’s tone control circuitry.
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes in the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–).
The MUTE indicator disappears from
the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 61).
Notes
LEVEL
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
PROGRAM
Remote control
Front panel
or
AMP
Notes
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
MUTE
27
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Selecting MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in
the front panel display.
MULTI CH INPUT
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press
MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to
turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display.
Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source, then select an
audio source.
If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
together with a video source, first select the video source, then
press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote
control).
Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display.
Note
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
CODE SET
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
Audio sources
Video sources
Selecting sound field programs
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
Program name
28
PLAYBACK
Remote control operation
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display.
y
Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for
DTS 96/24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then
sound field programs will be applied.
Enjoying multi-channel source
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoders.
Press AMP on the remote control to select the
AMP mode, then press EXTD SUR. to switch
between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback.
To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly while
PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.
Auto (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1 channels.
Decoders (select with j / i)
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in
6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in
6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
Off (OFF)
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
Notes
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
Sound field
program
buttons
AMP
AMP
MUTE
SET MENU
LEVEL
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
Program name
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
7
EXTD SUR.
AMP
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
29
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder manually
(PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX).
6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is
pressed in the following cases:
– When “SUR. LR” (see page 59) or “SUR. B” (see page 59) is
set to NONE.
When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
When the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
When “2ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected.
When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be
reset to AUTO.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is
set to NONE (see page 59).
Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.
ENHANCED programs.
Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER
program.
Press SELECT on the remote control to select
the decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on
the type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
When you select the SUR. STANDARD program:
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
Neo: 6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or
MOVIE THEATER program:
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
Neo: 6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set
to NONE (see page 59).
Notes
AMP
5
STANDARD
4
MOVIE
6
SELECT
Note
30
PLAYBACK
Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(Direct Stereo)
Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and
DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2-
channel PCM and analog sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press DIRECT ST. on the remote
control) to select “DIRECT STEREO”.
DIRECT STEREO
To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will
be heard.)
No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
TONE CONTROL (page 26) and SET MENU (page 57)
settings are not effective.
The front panel display automatically dims.
If you press AMP on the remote control to select the AMP
mode, then press DIRECT ST., the unit automatically enters
Direct Stereo mode and you cannot toggle between the unit’s
other sound field programs.
Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press AMP on the remote control to select the
AMP mode, then press NIGHT repeatedly to
select cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press j / i to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
Select MIN for minimum compression.
Select MID for standard compression.
Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
You cannot use the night listening modes with the Direct Stereo
program or MULTI CH INPUT.
The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
AMP
8
DIRECT ST.
PROGRAM
Front panel
or
Remote control
Notes
NIGHT
10
AMP
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
31
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote
control) to select 2ch Stereo.
2ch Stereo
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.
Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT on the remote
control) to select STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. LR” to NONE (see page 59), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. LR” is
set to NONE (see page 59) in the following cases:
When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– When you select a 2ch Stereo, 6ch Stereo, DIRECT STEREO
or SUR. STANDARD as a sound field program.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
decoder.
y
You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 62).
When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set INPUT MODE to
DTS.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player
depending on the player.
Note
Front panel
or
Remote control
AMP
1
STEREO
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
ENT.
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
Front panel
Remote control
or
AMP
Selecting input modes
Notes
INPUT
INPUT MODE
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
Input modeInput source
32
PLAYBACK
Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press STRAIGHT so that “STRAIGHT”
appears in the display.
STRAIGHT
3 Press u / d to display the following
information about the input signal.
(Format) Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
in Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels,
2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
CODE SET
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
then
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
RUNNING H/F 1
33
BASIC
OPERATION
English
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM, DAB (or BAND on the remote
control) to select the reception band.
“FM”or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown in the front panel display.
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
312
INPUT
TUNER
or
FM/AM
DAB
TITLE
BAND
LEVEL
or
AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
Lights up
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
Front panel Remote control
Front panel Remote control
34
FM/AM TUNING
Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station
will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception
to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM, DAB to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)) to
turn the colon (:) off.
AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
Disappears
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
AUTO
A
SP
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Presetting stations
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
231
FM/AM
DAB
FM
AUTO
Lights up
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
AUTO
A
SP
35
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options:
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT), then PRESET/CH
l / h to select the preset number under which the
first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will
stop when stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward the lower frequencies.
Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 33 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select
a preset station group (A to E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
AUTO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
L R
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
43 2,5
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Preset group
36
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (or A/B/C/D/E i on the
remote control) to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
Notes
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Preset number
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Selecting preset stations
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
21
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
1009
ENT.
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
1
2
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel Remote control
37
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/
CH u / d on the remote control) to select a
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear in the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1”.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
A
SP
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
MAIN
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 2
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
2,4 1,31,3
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
Press and hold
for more than 3 seconds
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
38
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by
FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System
function is carried out among the network stations.
This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such
as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type),
RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced
Other Networks) when receiving Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
PS (Program Service name) mode
The name of the Radio Data System station being received
is displayed.
PTY (Program Type) mode
There are 15 program types to classify Radio Data System
stations.
RT (Radio Text) mode
Information about the program (such as the title of the
song or name of the singer) on the Radio Data System
station being received is displayed using a maximum of 64
alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If
other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed
with an underbar (_).
CT (Clock Time) mode
The current time is displayed and updated every minute.
If the data is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear.
EON (Enhanced Other Networks)
See “EON function” on page 41.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
A
SP
Receiving Radio Data System
stations
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO General information
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Culture
SCIENCE Science
VARIED Light entertainment
POP M Pops
ROCK M Rock
M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)
LIGHT M Light classics
CLASSICS Serious classics
OTHER M Other music
39
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Four modes are available for displaying Radio Data
System data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that
correspond to the Radio Data System data services offered
by the station light up in the front panel display.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to set
this unit to tuner mode.
2 Press FREQ/TEXT repeatedly on the remote
control to display the various Radio Data
System data offered by the transmitting
station.
Do not press FREQ/TEXT until a Radio Data System indicator
lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode
if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has
not finished receiving all of the Radio Data System data from
the station.
Radio Data System data not offered by the station cannot be
selected.
This unit cannot utilize the Radio Data System data source if
the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT
mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the
RT mode may not be displayed even if other Radio Data System
modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
Radio Data System data may not be received under poor
reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display. Although this will change the reception
mode to manual, Radio Data System data may be displayed
when you change the display to Radio Data System mode.
If the signal strength is weakened by external interference
during the reception of a Radio Data System station, the Radio
Data System data service may be cut off suddenly and
“...WAIT” will appear in the front panel display.
Changing the Radio Data System
mode
TUNER
FREQ/TEXT
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display
Remote control
Notes
40
FM/AM TUNING
If you select the desired program type, this unit
automatically searches all preset Radio Data System
stations that are broadcasting a program of the required
type.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” flashes in the front panel display.
To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press
PTY SEEK MODE again.
2 Press PRESET/CH u / d to select the
desired program type.
The selected program type appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching
all preset Radio Data System stations.
The selected program type flashes and the
PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while searching for stations.
To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again.
The unit stops searching when it finds a station
broadcasting the selected type of program.
If the found station is not the one you desire, press
PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes
searching for another station broadcasting the same
type of program.
PTY SEEK function
AMP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
2
1,3
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
Remote control
Flashes
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
Remote control
POP M
PTY HOLD
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
Remote control
Lights up
41
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This function uses the EON data service on the Radio
Data System station network. If you select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all preset Radio Data
System stations that are scheduled to broadcast the
selected type of program and switches from the station
currently being received to the new station when the
broadcast starts.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
This function can only be used when a Radio Data System station
that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a
station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
1 Check that the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another
Radio Data System station so that the EON indicator
lights up.
2 Press EON repeatedly on the remote control
to select the desired program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT).
The selected program type name appears in the front
panel display.
If a preset Radio Data System station type starts
broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit
automatically switches from the program being
received to that program. (The EON indicator
flashes.)
When broadcasting of the selected program ends,
the unit returns to the previous station (or another
program on the same station).
To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is
shown in the front panel display.
EON function
Note
2
CODE SET
AMP
REC
AUDIO
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
TV VOL TV CH
MULTI CH IN
Remote control
EON
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
42
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting), also known as digital
radio, is a new way of radio broadcasting. DAB is
broadcast using digital signals instead of analog signals,
resulting in near CD-quality sound. Analog signals (i.e.
AM/FM) are susceptible to interference (i.e. distortion and
noise) caused by electrical equipment, weather conditions,
tall buildings, mountains, etc.; digital signals are not.
Thus, with DAB, there is virtually interference-free
reception and no hiss or crackle.
Another advantage of DAB is that a large amount of
information can be carried within the digital signal. DAB
is broadcast in blocks of data called ensembles (also
known as multiplexes). Several radio programs (called
services) can be broadcasted simultaneously in each
ensemble. This means that you can choose between
several radio programs within one frequency.
In addition to the audio signal, service information is also
broadcasted and displayed on this unit’s front panel
display. Part of the service information is text data
information called DLS (Dynamic Label Segment). For
more information, see page 46.
With DAB, there is no need to remember channel
frequencies, either. All broadcasts are selected by simply
selecting the service name.
Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area – not all areas
are presently covered. For a list of country DAB statuses and
worldwide DAB frequencies, you can check WorldDAB online
at http://www.worlddab.org.
The sound quality and service information are controlled by the
DAB broadcaster, not this unit. Not all DAB broadcasters
transmit PAD/SI information.
DAB signals are broadcast in Band-III (174 – 240 MHz) and
L-Band (1.452 – 1.492 GHz). This unit is able to receive both
bands.
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
About DAB
Notes
Ensemble
Service
Audio signal and
service information
43
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
For DAB tuning, the user does not tune in by station
frequency (like FM/AM), but tunes in via the channel
label instead. There are five DAB tuning methods:
ALPHANUMERIC, ACTIVE, ENSEMBLE,
FAVOURITE and PRESET.
Before tuning in to DAB services, it is necessary to do an
initial scan (see “INIT SCAN” on page 47) to create a
registry list of available ensembles and services in
advance.
Switching to DAB reception
1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM, DAB (or BAND on the remote
control) to select DAB.
DAB indicator lights up, when receiving DAB
broadcast signal.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) (SEARCH
MODE) (or SRCH MODE on the remote
control) to switch between AUTO and
PRESET.
When you select PRESET, the PRESET indicator
lights up.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/
CH u / d on the remote control) to search
the registered service.
To return to the top of the list, press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)
(or PRESET/CH j / i on the remote control).
DAB tuning
Important
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
312
INPUT
TUNER
Front panel Remote control
or
FM/AM
DAB
TITLE
BAND
LEVEL
Front panel Remote control
or
DAB
Lights up
Automatic tuning type Result
ALPHANUMERIC
Browse through the all registered DAB
services in numerical/alphabetical order
(0-9, A-Z).
ACTIVE
Browse through all of the receivable
DAB services in alphabetical order.
ENSEMBLE
Browse through the registered
ensembles in the order of the channel
label size from the smallest to the
largest.
FAVOURITE
Browse through the top 10
user-selected services.
PRESET
See page 45.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
or
PRESET
ENSEMBLE
ALPHANUMERIC
ACTIVE
FAVOURITE
PRESET
PRESET
Lights up
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
44
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
PRESET MEMORY mode is used to assign preset
numbers to DAB services.
1 Tune in to the DAB service you would like to
assign a preset number to.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) (or
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five
seconds.
There are two ways to select a preset service: either by using the
PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) or the numeric buttons.
3a Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to
browse through the assigned preset service
numbers in the registry list.
When not assigned, EMPTY appears next to the
number. Continue pressing the button until the
EMPTY appears. (You can also choose the assigned
preset number. In this case, the previous service is
replaced with the current service.)
3b Use the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter a preset number.
For example, to assign the current service
the number “56”:
If the number entered already exists (i.e. already
assigned to a service), then the previous service is
replaced with the current service.
4 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) (or
MEMORY on the remote control) to assign
the indicated preset number to the current
DAB service.
The MEMORY indicator turns off.
PRESET MEMORY
Note
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
BBC Radio 4
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
RETURN
MEMORY
or
Front panel
Remote control
Flashes
55 EMPTY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Appears on the front panel display
5
STANDARD
6
SELECT
PRESET 5_
PRESET 56
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
or
Front panel
RETURN
MEMORY
Remote control
45
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
PRESET tuning
With PRESET tuning, the users tunes in to DAB services
by entering the user-assigned preset service number.
1 Switch to DAB reception and select PRESET
as the tuning method, following steps 1
through 3 as described in “Switching to DAB
reception” on page 43.
There are two ways to select a preset service: either by using the
PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) or the numeric buttons.
2a Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/
CH u / d on the remote control) to browse
through the preset DAB services in the
registry list.
Only assigned preset numbers (along with its service)
appear; unassigned preset numbers are skipped.
2b Use the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter a preset service number.
For example, to select the preset service “56”:
For numbers less than 10, simply press “0” followed by the
number.
2c Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The numbers entered followed by the service
assigned to those numbers appear on the front panel
display for three seconds.
If there is no service assigned to the preset numbers
entered, the numbers entered followed by
“EMPTY” appears in the display screen for one
second. The service currently being broadcasted is
then displayed.
For example, if the preset number “56” was not
assigned to a service:
Note
Note
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Appears for three seconds
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
BBC Radio 4
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
56 BBC Radio 4
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel
Remote control
5
STANDARD
6
SELECT
PRESET 5_
PRESET 56
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
56 BBC Radio 4
Appears for three seconds
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
BBC Radio 4
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
56 EMPTY
Appears for one second
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DAB
TUNED
A B
SP
50 BBC Radio 2
Current service being broadcasted
46
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
The DISPLAY key shows various information about the
service currently being broadcasted.
1 While a service is currently being
broadcasted, press DISPLAY.
Each time DISPLAY is pressed, information about the
service being broadcasted is displayed in the front panel.
The service information is displayed in this order:
The information order starts from the beginning again
after “signal quality” information has been displayed.
Descriptions of the information types are listed
below:
Up to 14 characters can be displayed on the front panel
display at one time. If there are more than 14 characters in
the data text, the information being displayed will
continuously scroll from left to right, one letter at a time.
Service label
Displays the name of the current service (maximum
length of 16 letters).
DLS
DLS stands for Dynamic Label Segment.
Displays information about the program currently
being broadcasted. The current song or program title,
artist or speaker, or even what the next song or
program will be may be displayed. This data is
continuously updated by the DAB broadcaster, thus it
often changes (with every new song or program).
Other data, such as news, weather, and sports
headlines may be broadcasted as well.
Ensemble label
Displays the name of the current ensemble
(maximum length of 16 letters).
Program type
Displays the genre (song/program type) of the current
service (maximum length of 16 characters).
Date and time
Displays the current date and time. This data is
updated with each passing minute.
Audio mode/bit rate
Displays the audio mode and bit rate of the current
service.
Channel label/frequency
Displays the current service's channel label and
frequency.
Signal quality
Displays the signal strength (from 00 to 100) of the
current service. A higher number means better
reception.
DAB service information
Order Information Type Example
1Service label
Classic FM
2DLS
Classic FM on the
internet...
3 Ensemble label
Digital1 Network
4 Program type
Classic Music
5 Date and time
05JUL05 10:50
6 Audio mode / bit rate
Stereo 160Kbps
7
Channel label /
frequency
11D 222.06MHz
8 Signal quality
SignalQ.: 100
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Front panel
or
Remote control
Note
47
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
There are five operations in DAB MENU: INIT SCAN,
TUNE AID, DRC MODE, PRUNE LIST, and PRESET
DELETE. To access DAB MENU, perform the following:
1 Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press n.
“MANUAL SETUP” appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP.
The SOUND MENU parameter appears in the front
panel display.
4 Press n twice.
“DAB MENU” appears in the front panel display.
5 Press ENTER to access DAB MENU.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
INIT SCAN is one of the DAB MENU operations.
INIT SCAN locates all of the DAB ensembles and
services in your area. When this operation is selected, the
unit will scan the entire band (or both bands, if selected)
and create a registry list of every receivable DAB
ensemble and service.
This scan is necessary before the user can tune in to DAB
services. It should be done during the initial setup of this unit.
1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1
through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB
MENU” on this page.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press ENTER.
The INIT SCAN operations appear in the front panel
display.
3 Press j / i to switch between the INIT SCAN
operations.
Accessing DAB MENU
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
1
2-5
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
BASIC SETUP
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MANUAL SETUP
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
3 DAB MENU
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
A)INIT SCAN
INIT SCAN
Note
Operation name Function
SCAN:FULL
Scans both Band III (174-240MHz
in
Europe; 218-223 MHz in the U.K.
) and
L-Band (1.47-1.49GHz) for DAB
ensembles.
EUROPE model
SCAN:BAND3
U.K. model
SCAN:UK BAND3
Scans only Band III (174-240MHz in
Europe; 218-223 MHz in the U.K.) for
DAB ensembles.
SCAN:NO
Cancels the scan mode. Returns to the
DAB MENU.
A)INIT SCAN
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
SCAN:FULL
48
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
4 Press ENTER to select an operation.
The SCAN?[ENTER] verification message appears
in the front panel display if a scan is selected. (The
unit immediately returns to the DAB MENU if
SCAN:NO is selected.)
5 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The unit begins scanning the selected band(s) for
DAB ensembles.
During the scan, “SCANNING“ appears in the
front panel display.
When scanning has been completed, “FINISH”
appears in the front panel display, followed by the
number of receivable DAB services.
“FINISH [###]” is displayed for three seconds.
Scanning xx%
FINISH [015]
(Example: if 15 services were found.)
After three seconds, the unit returns to the INIT
SCAN menu.
If the INIT SCAN operations are not successful, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display.
FINISH [000]
Not Available
y
See the DAB section in TROUBLESHOOING for further
details or proper remedies (page 76).
If there are no preset DAB services, Initiate Scan or Not
Available appears in the front panel display.In this time,
press A/B/C/D/E (or PRESET u / d on the remote
control) to start INIT SCAN automatically.
y
Scanning is performed with the scan mode set in the set menu.
Using TUNE AID, the strength of the DAB signal that the
unit receives is indicated on the front panel display. TUNE
AID is used to adjust the positioning of the DAB antenna
and this unit, in order to discover which setup has the best
reception state.
It is recommended that you use TUNE AID when setting
up this unit in order to maximize DAB reception ability.
1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1
through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB
MENU” on page 47.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press n.
“TUNE AID” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press ENTER.
The signal strength level of the selected channel
appears in the front panel display. The signal strength
rating is from 00 (none) to 100 (best).
4 Press PRESET/CH j / i to switch to another
channel label.
The signal strength level of the new channel appears in
the front panel display. For a list of DAB frequencies,
see “DAB Frequency Table” on page 82.
5 Press ENTER exit TUNE AID.
The unit returns to the TUNE AID menu display.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
SCAN?[ENTER]
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
A)INIT SCAN
TUNE AID
A)INIT SCAN
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
B)TUNE AID
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
5A LEVEL: 80
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
5B LEVEL: 40
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
B)TUNE AID
49
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Dynamic range is the decibel (dB) range between the
highest and lowest sounds in a broadcast. Some DAB
broadcasters transmit a wide dynamic range (enabling
high quality sound), accompanied by Dynamic Range
Control (DRC) data. DRC can be used to compress the
dynamic range of the broadcast, making softer sounds
easier to hear. This is especially useful when listening to a
DAB service in a noisy environment or at a low volume
(such as at night).
1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1
through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB
MENU” on page 47.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press n twice.
“DRC MODE” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press ENTER.
The DRC MODE option appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press PRESET/CH j / i to switch between
AUTO and OFF.
If DRC MODE: AUTO is set and the broadcast
contains DRC data, then the DRC indicator lights up.
5 Press ENTER.
The unit returns to the DRC MODE menu display.
Dynamic Range Control
A)INIT SCAN
C)DRC MODE
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
DRC MODE: OFF
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
Operation name Function
DRC MODE: AUTO
Utilizes the DRC data (if transmitted).
The dynamic range of the signal is
compressed, enhancing the audio
quality at low volumes or in a noisy
environment.
DRC MODE: OFF
Does not utilize DRC data (if
transmitted). The dynamic range of the
signal is played in full, enabling high
sound quality.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
DRC MODE: OFF
DRC MODE: AUTO
or
DRC
Lights up
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
C)DRC MODE
50
DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)
PRUNE LIST (PRUNE LIST) is used to delete a group of
inactive ensembles and services from the DAB registry
list.
1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1
through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB
MENU” on page 47.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press n three times.
“PRUNE LIST” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press ENTER.
The “OK?[ENTER]” verification message appears in
the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Unnecessary services are deleted from the registry
list. Once this operation has been completed,
“FINISH” appears in the front panel display for one
second.
The unit returns to the PRUNE LIST menu display.
Use PRESET DELETE to delete specific unnecessary
services from the DAB registry list.
1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1
through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB
MENU” on page 47.
“INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press n four times.
“PRESET DEL” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press ENTER.
“DELETE:--” appears in the front panel display.
4 Press l / h.
Select the setting number of the service you wish to
remove.
Only preset number appears in the front panel display.
5 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The selected service is deleted from the registry list.
When this operation has been completed, “DELETE
OK” appears in the front panel display for one second.
The unit returns to the PRESET DELETE menu
display.
PRUNE LIST
A)INIT SCAN
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
D)PRUNE LIST
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
OK?[ENTER]
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
FINISH
D)PRUNE LIST
PRESET DELETE
A)INIT SCAN
E)PRESET DEL
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
DELETE:--
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
DELETE:56
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
DELETE OK
E)PRESET DEL
RUNNING H/F 1
51
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operating instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SP LEVEL”
(page 60) and the sound field programs does not affect recorded
material.
A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
You can only record analog signals.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not
output on VCR OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
1
2
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
12
INPUT
CODE SET
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
or
Front panel
Remote control
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
52
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 31) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 27 to 31.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
1
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels (left and right) or plays back
2-channel sources as is.
MULTI
2-CH
2
MUSIC:
Pop/Rock
This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the
feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT:
TV Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field
employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the
experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,
music programs or sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old
movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound
depth using only the presernce sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
53
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
English
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
4
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field
of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,
making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any
kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
MULTI
2-CH
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad
and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The
sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the
reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm
and multi-channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive
sound field.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
54
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 27 to 31.
For music sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
1
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2-channel (left and right) playback.
2-CH
STEREO:
6ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This
provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
2
MUSIC:
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately
1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections
which produce a very full, rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC:
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.
MUSIC:
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The
data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listeners
virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly
concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
55
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time
for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Using the sleep timer
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
HiFi DSP
LR
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
TUNED
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
SLEEP indicator
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
56
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22) and
“SP LEVEL” (page 60).
1 Press AMP.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L Front left speaker level
CENTER Center speaker level
FRONT R Front right speaker level
SUR. R Surround right speaker level
SUR. B Surround back speaker level
SUR. L Surround left speaker level
SWFR Subwoofer level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing u / d.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
4 Press ENTER when you have completed your
adjustment.
y
This operation can also be performed using the controls on the
front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you
want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.
Manually adjusting speaker levels
AMP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
1
3
4
2
SET MENU
57
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
BASIC SETUP
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 22).
MANUAL SETUP
Use to adjust speaker and system settings manually.
1 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). You can
use SOUND MENU to make further adjustmen
ts.
2 INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode.
3 DAB MENU
Use to adjust the DAB tuner parameters and ensemble/service registry list.
SET MENU
Item Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over
frequency.
59
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
60
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
60
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
60
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
60
F)D. RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
61
G)AUDIO SET
Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
61
Item Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGN
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
61
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
62
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the inputs.
62
Item Features Page
A>INIT SCAN
This menu is the initial scan to receive each service in DAB.
This scan is necessary before the user can tune in to DAB services.
62
B>TUNE AID
Check the signal strength of initial setting in DAB.
62
C>DRC MENU
Use to enjoy strong sound such as at night, etc.
62
D>PRUNE LIST
Use to delete a group of inactive ensemble and services from the DAB registry list.
62
E>PRESET DEL
Use to delete specific unnecessary services from the DAB registry list.
62
58
SET MENU
4 OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press u / d to display MANUAL SETUP.
MANUAL SETUP
4 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP.
1 SOUND MENU appears in the front panel display.
1 SOUND MENU
5 Press u / d to display the desired menu.
6 Press ENTER to enter the displayed menu.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the
items you want to adjust.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the
submenu, then press u / d to select the item
and j / i to change the parameter.
Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Item Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
63
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
63
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
63
D)MULTI ZONE
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
63
Using SET MENU
AMP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
2,8
1
3-7
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 DAB MENU
4 OPTION MENU
59
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate
for video signal processing delays when using LCD
monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU
parameters are set automatically when you perform
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 22).
Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
Center speaker CENTER
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit
directs the entire range of the center channel signal to
the center speaker.
Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
Select LRG if you have large surround left and right
speakers. The entire range of the surround channel
signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select SML if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”.
Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 31) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SUR. B) to NONE.
Surround back speaker SUR. B
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
Select LRG if you have a large surround back speaker.
Select SML if you have a small surround back speaker.
The low-frequency signals of the surround back
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
Bass out BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH
Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set the front speakers to
SML).
Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want
to output low-frequency signals from front channels to
both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-
frequency signals from other channels are also directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use
this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using
the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.
Cross over CrossOver
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
switch the phase of your subwoofer.
Choices: NRM (normal), REV (reverse)
Select NRM if you do not want to reverse the phase of
your subwoofer.
Select REV to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
1 SOUND MENU
60
SET MENU
Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the level of each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 59).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
C adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker.
SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker.
SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speaker.
SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m
FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m
FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m
SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
SUR. B adjusts the distance of the surround back
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m
SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.0 m
Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments listening to the currently selected
source component or a test tone.
You can adjust 5 frequency bands:
100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz
Choices: –6 to +6 dB
Select ON to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the
currently selected source component.
Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 dB
Speaker SP LFE
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HP LFE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the “LFE LEVEL” setting, some signals may not
be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
Note
61
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Dynamic range F)D. RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)
Speaker SP D.R
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone HP D.R
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
Select MAX for feature films.
Select STD for general use.
Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use to customize this units overall audio settings.
Muting type MUTE TYP.
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: FULL, –20dB
Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.
Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 160 ms
Tone bypass TC.BYPASS
Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control
circuitry when TREBLE and BASS (page 26) are set to
0dB.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input
mode.
Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGN
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more
components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (C.V[A]) and
B(C.V[B])
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OUT(1))
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
VCR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 (IN (2)), 3 (IN (3)),
4 (IN (4))
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
VCR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
VCR
(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
VCR
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 (IN (5))
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
VCR
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
2 INPUT MENU
Notes
62
SET MENU
Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect
the type of input signal and select the appropriate input
mode.
Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that source.
Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EXTD SUR.
button will not be recalled.
Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
4 Press u / d to select the character you want,
then use j / i to move to the next space.
You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
Press d to change the character in the following
order, or press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space,
symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.).
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each
input.
6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Use to adjust the DAB tuner parameters and ensemble/
service registry list.
Init scan A)INIT SCAN
Use this feature to locate all the DAB broadcasts in your
area. The unit scans the entire band (or both bands, if
selected) and creates a registry list of every receivable
ensemble and service.
Choices: SCAN:FULL, SCAN:BAND3
Tune Aid B)TUNE AID
Use this feature to determine the signal strength level of a
selected ensemble. This allows the user to discover the
best setup/placement for optimum DAB reception.
DRC mode C)DRC MODE
Use this feature to compress the dynamic range of the
DAB broadcast, making softer sounds easier to hear. This
is especially useful when listening to a DAB service in a
noisy environment or at night.
Choices: DRC MODE: AUTO, DRC MODE: OFF
Prune list D)PRUNE LIST
Use this feature to delete all of the inactive ensembles
from the DAB registry list.
Preset delete E)PRESET DELETE
Use this feature to delete specific unnecessary services
from the DAB registry list.
Note
3 DAB MENU
63
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: ON, OFF
Select ON to protect:
DSP program parameters
All SET MENU items
All speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.
Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field
program that you want to initialize.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE, STANDARD
You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON.
Zone set D)MULTI ZONE
Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Speaker B setting SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit
when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both
headphones and SPEAKERS B.
If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,
the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
4 OPTION MENU
Notes
Notes
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
64
The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front
panel display.
y
During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted.
During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON,
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h buttons on the
front panel are available for operation.
Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit
to play back audio or video signals.
1 While this unit is in standby mode, hold
down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press
STANDBY/ON.
This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP
menu appears in the front panel display.
2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu
and select the item you want to set up.
See the end of this section for a complete list of
available parameters.
3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to
toggle between the available parameters.
4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
This completes the advanced setup procedure.
The settings you made are reflected the next time this
unit’s power is turned on.
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
CAUTION
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
1,3 2
1,4
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down, press
PROGRAM
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
65
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit.
Choices: 8 MIN, 4 MIN
•Select 8 MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 .
•Select 4 MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 .
Factory presets PRESET
Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see
page 78).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s
parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory
presets.
Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters
to be initialized when you reset the factory presets.
This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item
parameters.
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
4 Ω ΜΙΝ
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
8 Ω ΜΙΝ
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Note
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
66
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and
other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control
codes.
Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate
the AMP mode.
Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-A UXDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
ENTER
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
The buttons in the
dotted lines
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, MULTI CH
IN, VOLUME +/–,
MUTE and input
selector buttons)
function in any
mode.
Press AMP
to control
this unit.
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-A UXDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
ENTER
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
REC
AUDIO
MENUTITLE
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
START
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
MODE PTY SEEK
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
POWER POWER
AVTV
The input selector buttons
switch the function of the
component control area
below.
Component control
area
You can control up to 6
different components by
setting appropriate remote
control codes (see
page 67).
67
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each area.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
*1
You have control only over this unit and other YAMAHA
tuners.
*2
You must set TV remote control codes at the DTV/CBL button
(other remote control codes can be set at any input selector
button except DTV/CBL).
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s).
1 While holding down CODE SET, press an
input selector button
to select the
component you want to set up.
You must press and hold CODE SET throughout this
procedure.
2 With CODE SET depressed, use the numeric
buttons to enter the three-digit remote
control code for the component to be used.
Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES”
at the end of this manual.
To reset the code, enter the default code for each
component shown in the previous table.
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
You can only assign one remote control code to each input
selector button.
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Component
category
(Library)
Manufacturer
Default
YAMAHA
code
CD CD YAMAHA 199
MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 499
TUNER
*1
TUNER YAMAHA fixed
DVD DVD YAMAHA 699
DTV/CBL
*2
––
V-AUX
VCR
Note
Note
Notes
CODE SET
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUXDVD
AMP
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CODE SET
AMP
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MULTI CH IN
68
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you
can use this remote to control your other components.
Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component. Use the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to operate. The remote
control automatically switches to the appropriate control
mode for that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV/CBL.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the remote control code is set in VCR.
Controlling other components
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-A UXDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
ENTER
1
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
2
3
4
5
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
CD player MD/CD recorder
Tuner
1 AV P O W E R
Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 TV POWER
TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2
3 REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec VCR rec *3 Disc Skip Rec (MD)
p Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play
w Search backward Search backward
VCR search
backward *3
Search backward Search backward PTY SEEK MODE
f Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward PTY SEEK START
AUDIO Audio
e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward FRQ/TEXT
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward EON
s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop
4 TV VOL +
TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2
TV VOL – TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2
5 TV CH +
TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2
TV CH – TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2
6 TV MUTE
TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2
7 TITLE
Title
8 PRESET/CH u
Up VCR channel up Preset up (1-8)
PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Preset down (1-8)
j Left
i Right Preset up (A-E)
ENTER Select
9 RETURN
Return
0 TV INPUT
TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2
A 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)
B ENT.
Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index
C MENU
Menu
D DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
69
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the players instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 Press AMP.
2 Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
3 Press u / d to select
the parameters.
4 Press j / i to change
the parameter value.
y
If you press and hold j / i to change the parameter value, the
front panel display automatically stops at the factory preset
parameter momentarily.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field Changing parameter settings
CODE SET
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AU XDVD
AMP
POWER POWER
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/TEXT EON
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
AVTV
VCR
DTV/CBL
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOLU ME
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE TV INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
ENTER
2
3,4
1
AMP
MUTE
SET MENU
LEVEL
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSIC
STEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
DIRECT ST.EXTD SUR.STANDARD
SELECT
NIGHT
B
SPEAKERS
A
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/EA/B/C/D/E
70
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 63).
Resetting parameters to the factory
presets
Use PARAM. INI (see page 63).
Note
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
71
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
DSP LEVEL (DSP level)
Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)
Function: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound
and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the reflection face. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
to 99 msec
For 2ch Stereo:
DIRECT (Direct)
Function: Bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors for pure high fidelity sound when playing 2-channel
analog sources. The AUTO setting is effective when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB while the night
listening mode is set to OFF.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and
right speakers.
When “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, or “FRONT” set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” set to SWFR, front left and right speaker low-
frequency signals are redirected to the subwoofer.
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
72
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
For 6ch Stereo:
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
CT LEVEL (Center level)
SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music:
PANORAMA (Panorama)
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
DIMENSION (Dimension)
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
This parameter can be set only when SUR. STANDARD is selected.
For DTS Neo:6 Music:
C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
This parameter can be set only when SUR. STANDARD is selected.
Note
Note
TROUBLESHOOTING
73
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters the standby
mode soon after the
power has been
turned on.
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
65
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
11-13
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
15-21
The input mode is set to DTS or
ANALOG.
Select AUTO.
31
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote
control) or the input selector buttons.
25
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
12
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
25
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation button of this unit to
resume audio output, then adjust the volume.
26
The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
31
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
74
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
65
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
26
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
12
Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings.
60
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
31
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
27, 52
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
60
“CENTER” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
59
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
6ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
27, 52
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
60
“SUR. LR” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
59
A monaural source is being played with
STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.
No sound from the
surround back
speaker.
“SUR. LR” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
NONE, the surround back speaker setting is
automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate
setting for the surround speakers.
59
“SUR. B” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML.
59
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to
FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
59
“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to
SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
59
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
75
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
31
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
15-19
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
15-19
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is
set to ON.
Select OFF.
63
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
76
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer
to page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
20
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
20
Use the manual tuning method.
34
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
34
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult
to eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
DAB
Cannot tune in to any
DAB stations.
The INIT SCAN wasn’t performed, or
the DAB registry list needs to be
updated.
Perform the INIT SCAN.
47
There may be no DAB coverage in
your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB
online at http://www.worlddab.org
for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
The DAB
signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
21
The INIT SCAN
operations are not
successful and “Not
Available” appears in
the front panel display.
The DAB antenna may not be
connected.
Make sure to the DAB antenna is firmly
connected.
21
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality DAB outdoor antenna.
21
There is no DAB service in your area.
42
The service reception is
weak.
The positioning of the indoor DAB
antenna and/or the unit isn’t optimal
for DAB reception.
Use TUNE AID to locate the best DAB
antenna and unit positioning for optimal
DAB reception.
48
The DAB
signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
21
There is noise
interference
(e.g. hiss or crackle)
The indoor DAB antenna needs to be
repositioned.
Readjust the position of the indoor DAB
antenna.
21
The DAB signal is too weak. Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna.
The service information
does not appear or is
inaccurate.
The service may be temporarily out of
order or isn’t provided by the DAB
broadcasting company.
Contact the DAB broadcasting company.
77
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis
from the front panel.
7
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
67
Try to set another code for the same remote control
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
67
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
78
If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any
reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets
ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign
and tuner presets.
Be sure this unit is in standby mode.
1 While this unit is in standby mode, hold
down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press
STANDBY/ON.
The ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front
panel display.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure without making any
changes, press STANDBY/ON.
2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu
and select “PRESET”.
3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the
desired setting.
RESET To reset the unit to its factory presets.
CANCEL To cancel without making any changes.
4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
If you selected “RESET”, the unit is reset to its
factory presets and switches to standby mode.
If you selected “CANCEL”, the unit switches to
standby mode and nothing is reset.
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAYMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVEL
NEXT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
EDIT
SEARCH MODE DAB
DISPLAY
STANDBY
/ON
1,3 2
1,4
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down, press
PROGRAM
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
GLOSSARY
79
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1
center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also
available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie
mode.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode
for movies (for 2-channel sources only) and a Game mode
for games.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD-video.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation
of DTS digital surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound
(technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding
the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for
6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
80
GLOSSARY
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
Sound field programs Audio information
81
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
82
GLOSSARY
Band III
L-Band
DAB Frequency Table
Frequency Channel label
174.928 MHz 5A
176.640 MHz 5B
178.352 MHz 5C
180.064 MHz 5D
181.936 MHz 6A
183.648 MHz 6B
185.360 MHz 6C
187.072 MHz 6D
188.928 MHz 7A
190.640 MHz 7B
192.352 MHz 7C
194.064 MHz 7D
195.936 MHz 8A
197.648 MHz 8B
199.360 MHz 8C
201.072 MHz 8D
202.928 MHz 9A
204.640 MHz 9B
206.352 MHz 9C
208.064 MHz 9D
209.936 MHz 10A
211.648 MHz 10B
213.360 MHz 10C
215.072 MHz 10D
216.928 MHz 11A
218.640 MHz 11B
220.352 MHz 11C
222.064 MHz 11D
223.936 MHz 12A
225.648 MHz 12B
227.360 MHz 12C
229.072 MHz 12D
Frequency Channel label
230.784 MHz 13A
232.496 MHz 13B
234.208 MHz 13C
235.776 MHz 13D
237.488 MHz 13E
239.200 MHz 13F
Frequency Channel label
1452.960 MHz LA
1454.672 MHz LB
1456.384 MHz LC
1458.096 MHz LD
1459.808 MHz LE
1461.520 MHz LF
1463.232 MHz LG
1464.944 MHz LH
1466.656 MHz LI
1468.368 MHz LJ
1470.080 MHz LK
1471.792 MHz LL
1473.504 MHz LM
1475.216 MHz LN
1476.928 MHz LO
1478.640 MHz LP
1480.352 MHz LQ
1482.064 MHz LR
1483.776 MHz LS
1485.488 MHz LT
1487.200 MHz LU
1488.912 MHz LV
1490.624 MHz LW
SPECIFICATIONS
83
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ...................................... 85 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ........................................................ 115/150/185/230 W
Maximum Output Power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ........................................................130 W
IEC Output Power
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ..........................................................95 W
Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ................................................. 120 or more
Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω)................................ 0.06% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................ 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 k terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more
Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100
Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 k
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 k
Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 k
SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 k
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type ..................................................................... PAL
Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
DAB SECTION
Tuning Range
(Band III) ............................................................. 174 to 240 MHz
(L-Band) .......................................................... 1452 to 1492 MHz
Sensitivity
(Band III)........................................................................... -99 dBm
(L-Band)........................................................................... -95 dBm
Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 97 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion .................................................... 0.005%
Stereo Separation 1 kHz ........................................................... 95dB
Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to20 kHz/ +0.5/-0.5 dB
GENERAL
Power Supply ........................................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Power Consumption .............................................................. 360 W
Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less
•AC Outlets
[U.K. models] ............................. 1 (Total 100 W max 0.4 A max)
[Europe models] ........................... 2 (Total 50 W max 0.2 A max)
Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 416 mm
Weight ..................................................................................... 11 kg
SPECIFICATIONS
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE
LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES
TV
Admiral 292, 293
Aiwa 294, 276, 283, 284
Akai 295, 296
Alba 296
AOC 297
Bell&Howell 292
Bestar 298
Blaupunkt 229, 222
Blue sky 298
Brandt 223
Brocsonic 297
Bush 296
Clatronic 298
Craig 224
Croslex 225
Curtis Mathis 297, 226
Daewoo 297, 298, 224,
227, 228
Daytron 239
Dual 298
Dwin 293
Emerson 297, 224, 239, 232
Ferguson 223, 265, 266
First line 298
Funai 277, 278
Fisher 295, 233
Fraba 298
GE 293, 297, 234,
235, 236
LG/Goldstar 297, 298, 239, 237
Goodmans 296, 298, 223
Grundig 229, 238, 249
Hitachi 297, 239, 242,
243, 285
ICE 296
Irradio 296
Itt/Nokia 244, 245
JC Penny 293, 297, 234, 237
JVC 296, 246, 247, 286
Kendo 298
KTV 297, 239
Loewe 298, 248
LXI 293, 297, 225,
226, 233
Magnavox 297, 225, 239
Marantz 298
Matsui 295
Memorex 297
Mitsubishi 299, 297, 259, 287
NEC 297, 252, 282
Nokia 244, 245
Nokia Oceanic 245
Nordmende 265, 266
Onwa 296
Panasonic 234, 235, 236,
253, 288, 211
Philco 297, 225, 239
Philips 225
Pioneer 226, 235, 254,
255, 268
Portland 297, 256
Proscan 293
Proton 297
Quasar 234, 235
Radio Shack 299, 293, 297
RCA 293, 297, 234,
256, 257, 258
SABA 223, 269, 265, 266
Sampo 297
Samsung 297, 239, 248,
262, 275
Sanyo 295, 233, 279,
272, 273, 274, 212
Schneider 296
Scott 297
Sharp 292, 239, 232,
213, 216
Siemens 229
Signature 292
Sony 263, 214
Sylvania 297, 225
Telefunken 269, 264, 265, 266
Thomson 223, 266
Toshiba 292, 226, 267, 215
Videch 297, 242
Wards 297, 239, 232
Yamaha 299, 292, 253, 242
VCR
Admiral 395
Aiwa 396, 397, 398, 329
Akai 322, 323, 324
Audio Dynamic 392, 394
Bell&Howell 393
Blaupunkt 325, 326
Brocsonic 327
Bush 322
Canon 325, 328
CGM 396, 332
Citizen 396
Craig 396, 363
Curtis Mathis 397, 328, 333
Daewoo 328, 334, 335
DBX 392, 394
Dimensia 333
Dynatech 397
Emerson 327, 334, 396, 397
Fisher 393, 336
Funai 397
GE 328, 333, 387
Go Video 353
LG/Goldstar 396, 388
Goodmans 334, 337
Grundig 332, 338
Hitachi 325, 333, 349,
342, 343
Instant Replay 325, 328
Itt/Nokia 393
JC Penny 392, 393, 394,
328, 333, 349,
396, 363
JVC 392, 394, 344,
345, 346, 347
Kendo 396
Kenwood 392, 394, 396
Loewe 396, 337
Luxor 395
LXI 393, 396, 397,
336, 349
Magnavox 325, 326, 328
Marantz 392, 394
Marta 396
Matsui 396
Memorex 328, 336, 396, 397
Minolta 333, 349
Mitsubishi 399, 344, 348,
359, 352, 353
MTC 363, 397
Multitech 397, 348, 354
NEC 392, 394, 344, 383
Nokia 393, 395
Nokia Oceanic 395
Okano 323
Olympic 325, 328
Orion 327
Panasonic 325, 328, 355,
378, 384, 385, 386
Pentax 333, 349
Philco 325, 328, 397
Philips 325, 326, 328,
337, 356, 357
Phonola 337
Pilot 396
Pioneer 325
Quasar 325, 328
RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326,
328, 333, 335,
349, 358, 369,
363, 397
Realistic 393, 397, 328,
336, 359, 362,
396, 363
Samsung 354, 358, 363,
364, 365, 366
Sansui 394
Sanyo 393, 336, 367
Schneider 337
Scott 399, 335, 336,
348, 359, 352,
354, 358
Seleco 322
Sharp 395, 362, 382
Siemens 393
Signature 2000 395, 397
Sony 368, 379, 372,
373, 374, 375
Sylvania 397, 325, 326, 328
Symphonic 397
Tandberg 334
Tandy 397
Tashiro 396
Tatung 392, 394
Teac 392, 394, 397
Technics 325, 328
Teknika 396
Telefunken 376, 377
Thomas 397
Thorn 393, 396
Toshiba 335, 369, 389
Totevison 363, 396
Unitech 363
Universum 396, 327, 376
Videosonic 363
W.WHouse 396
Wards 395, 396, 336, 362
Yamaha 399, 392, 393, 394
Zenith 344, 368, 379,
396, 397
DVD player
DENON 623, 624
Funai 625
HITACHI 626
JVC 627
KENWOOD 628
Mitsubishi 629
Onkyo 632, 633, 634
Panasonic 623, 635
Philips 699, 647
Pioneer 636, 637, 638
RCA 639
Samsung 642
Sharp 643
Sony 644
Toshiba 634
LG/GOLD STAR 645
THOMSON 646
Yamaha 699, 622, 623
CD player
Yamaha 199
CD recorder
Yamaha 499
MD recorder
Yamaha 599
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V100D
Printed in Malaysia WG22480
RX-V100D
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
G

Documenttranscriptie

G RX-V100D © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG22480 RX-V100D AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS.........................52 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 52 For music sources .................................................... 54 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................55 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 55 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 56 SET MENU ............................................................57 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS ............................................... 15 BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 22 Using the BASIC SETUP menu .............................. 22 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 25 FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 33 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......69 What is a sound field ............................................... 69 Changing parameter settings ................................... 69 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................71 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................73 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........78 GLOSSARY...........................................................79 Audio formats .......................................................... 79 Sound field programs............................................... 80 Audio information ................................................... 80 Video signal information ......................................... 81 DAB Frequency Table............................................. 82 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................83 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 33 Presetting stations .................................................... 34 Selecting preset stations........................................... 36 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37 Receiving Radio Data System stations .................... 38 Changing the Radio Data System mode .................. 39 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 40 EON function........................................................... 41 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 25 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 27 Selecting input modes.............................................. 31 Control area ............................................................. 66 Setting remote control codes ................................... 67 Controlling other components ................................. 68 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20 Connecting the DAB antenna .................................. 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 21 Turning on the power............................................... 21 ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................64 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................66 BASIC OPERATION Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 14 Using SET MENU................................................... 58 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 59 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 61 3 DAB MENU ......................................................... 62 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 63 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING)... 42 English About DAB.............................................................. 42 DAB tuning.............................................................. 43 PRESET MEMORY................................................ 44 DAB service information......................................... 46 Accessing DAB MENU........................................... 47 INIT SCAN.............................................................. 47 TUNE AID............................................................... 48 Dynamic Range Control .......................................... 49 PRUNE LIST........................................................... 50 PRESET DELETE................................................... 50 RECORDING ....................................................... 51 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 85 W + 85 W Center: 85 W Surround: 85 W + 85 W Surround back: 85 W ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting reception) ◆ DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) information display ◆ Locate all DAB services in your area using INIT SCAN ◆ Optimize DAB reception using TUNE AID Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ A SET MENU that provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control Batteries x2 (AA, R06, UM-3) AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Indoor DAB antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK AMP START VOLUME TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 4 DIRECT ST. 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT 0 10 ENT. SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert two supplied batteries (AA, R06, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ / –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 1 Notes on batteries 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 9 0 AB C D E 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT * Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in FM/AM tuner mode. Switches to the top of the service list when the unit is in DAB tuner mode. Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is not in tuner mode. 4 F G H I 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL –/+ * Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display when the unit is in FM/AM tuner mode. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. Browses through the list of stored or preset services when this unit is in DAB tuner mode. Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode. 6 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) (DISPLAY) * Switches between automatic tuning (AUTO indicator on) and manual tuning (AUTO indicator off) when this unit is in FM/AM tuner mode. Displays various service information of the current broadcast when this unit is in DAB tuner mode (see page 46). 8 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION 9 PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. 0 SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. A PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)* SERCH MODE Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when this unit is in FM/AM tuner mode. Switches between the AUTO and PRESET tuning methods when this unit is in DAB tuner mode. B STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. C FM/AM, DAB Switches the reception band between FM, AM, or DAB when the unit is in tuner mode. D PROGRAM l / h Use to select sound field programs (see page 26). Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right speakers (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). E TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right speakers (see page 26). F INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 31). G INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. H MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). I VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. English * Used when the unit is in DAB reception mode (see page 42). 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 66. 1 STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 3 4 5 CODE SET FREQ/TEXT EON 8 AMP MODE PTY SEEK TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 START 0 9 0 A B C D VOLUME E MUTE F 10 ENT. SET MENU LEVEL 6 7 2 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control function. 3 Radio Data System tuning buttons SYSTEM 2 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE G H I ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH J FREQ/TEXT Press this button when the unit is receiving a Radio Data System station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those Radio Data System data services) and/or the frequency display (see page 39). PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 40). PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 40). EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see page 41). 4 Sound field program/numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the unit is in tuner mode. Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in surround (see page 29). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 28). Use DIRECT ST. to playback 2-channel sources in high fidelity sound (see page 30). 5 SPEAKERS A/B Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. 6 LEVEL (BAND) Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. Switches the reception band between FM, AM, and DAB when the unit is in tuner mode. 7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / ENTER Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or SET MENU items. Press i to select a preset station group (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when the unit is in tuner mode. 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 RETURN (MEMORY) Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the SET MENU parameters. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. A SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 55). VOLUME MAIN PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY EDIT ZONE 2 INTRODUCTION 9 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. Using the remote control NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT B MULTI CH IN Selects multi-channel input when using an external decoder (etc.). C CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 67). SILENT CINEMA 30 30 Approximately 6 m SYSTEM POWER POWER TV STANDBY POWER AV CD MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL TUNER VCR SLEEP V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK TV VOL TV MUTE AMP START VOLUME TV CH TV INPUT MUTE STEREO D AMP Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to control the main unit. E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. F MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. G STRAIGHT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 A SPEAKERS B 9 7 8 NIGHT 0 10 STRAIGHT ENT. SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places H NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 30). I SET MENU (MENU) Activates the SET MENU function (see page 57). J DISPLAY Displays various service information of the current broadcast when this unit is in DAB tuner mode (see page 46). English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 t 3 2 96 24 MATRIX DISCRETE q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x VIRTUAL VCR STANDARD SECONDARY 4 5 V-AUX 6 DTV/CBL NIGHT MD/CD-R DVD PRESET SILENT CINEMA DAB 89 7 SP AB HiFi DSP 0A TUNER DRC PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP F G H I 2 STANDARD indicator Lights up when Surround Standard or Surround Enhanced is selected (see page 29). 3 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 26). 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 6 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7 PRESET indicator Lights up when a preset station is selected. 8 AUTO indicator Lights up to indicate that automatic tuning is possible. 9 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 8 dB 96/24 mS dB 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. Left surround DSP sound field CD ft E J C AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PCM D B K L M DUAL L C R LFE SL SB SR N OPQR A MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored. B MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. C VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E SECONDARY indicator Lights up when a secondary signal is selected. F DAB indicator Lights up when Digital Audio Broadcasting mode is selected. G NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. H SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. I Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. J HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. K DRC indicator Lights up when this unit is set to DRC MODE: AUTO: and DRC (Dynamic Range Control) data is transmitted in the DAB tuner mode. L Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION M Radio Data System indicators The name(s) of the Radio Data System data offered by the currently received Radio Data System station light(s) up. EON lights up when an Radio Data System station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. N SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. O 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. P DUAL indicator Lights up when a dual monaural signal is input to this unit. Q LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. R Input channel indicators/speaker indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Indicate the number of speakers connected in SPEAKERS (page 23), or indicate the channel being adjusted in SP LEVEL (page 60). English 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR 5 DAB DVD MULTI CH INPUT R L DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL AUDIO R VIDEO L VIDEO FRONT DVD SURROUND DTV /CBL S VIDEO AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MONITOR OUT TUNER CENTER SUB WOOFER DTV /CBL IN MD/CD-R + DVD DTV/CBL DIGITAL INPUT IN (PLAY) SUB WOOFER SURROUND + + R – – + + CENTER – – L + S VIDEO FM ANT L R AUDIO B 75W UNBAL. MONITOR OUT OUTPUT 7 8 9 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack Used when making a MD or CD recording. See page 19 for connection information. 2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 4 DAB antenna terminal See page 21 for connection information. 5 AC OUTLETS Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 21). 10 L A VIDEO OUT (REC) + 6 – – GND MD /CD-R CD COAXIAL R AM ANT OUT CD SPEAKERS FRONT VCR – – SURROUND + BACK 0 6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. 7 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 8 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 13 for connection information. 9 Antenna terminals See page 20 for connection information. 0 Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) FL C SR 60˚ SL 80˚ The surround back speaker supplements the surround speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. Subwoofer FR 30˚ SL Surround back speaker (SB) SR SB The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. PREPARATION . The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. 1.8 m Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) English The center speaker is used for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 11 SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 4 ohms before using (see page 14). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the end of each speaker cable. Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm 12 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. SPEAKER SETUP Front speakers (A) Right Left Subwoofer system 1 Surround speakers Right Left 2 3 6 7 PREPARATION DAB DIGITAL OUTPUT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MD/CD-R OPTICAL MD/CD-R + DVD SPEAKERS FRONT R – – DTV/CBL L + + R SURROUND – – – – L + A B SUB WOOFER OUTPUT + – – Front speakers (B) + + CENTER SURROUND + BACK 4 5 Center speaker Surround back speaker ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems (2, 3) to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminals. ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (4) to these terminals. ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (6, 7) to these terminals. ■ SUBWOOFER jack 4 2 1 6 3 7 5 Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Speaker layout Connect a surround back speaker (5) to these terminals. English 13 SPEAKER SETUP Speaker impedance setting 3 CAUTION Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to select “4Ω MIN”. STRAIGHT If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. EFFECT 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,4 1 1,3 2 While this unit is in standby mode, hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON EFFECT 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select “SP IMP.”. PROGRAM 14 This unit is switched back to standby mode. The setting you made is reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Video jacks For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals. For video signals video cables V S-video cables S PR component video cables S VIDEO VIDEO PREPARATION ■ Cable indications PB Y ■ Analog jacks You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. English 15 CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Note Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. Video out Optical out DVD player Audio out R O L V PR S PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD AUDIO R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R VIDEO L VIDEO S VIDEO DVD MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DVD DTV/CBL VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT 16 Video in Video monitor CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. PREPARATION MULTI CH INPUT R L DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL FRONT SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER R L Subwoofer out R L Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder Surround out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output. English 17 CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS ■ Connections for other video components Notes • Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connection. • When recording, you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component. Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out O R L V PR S PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR AUDIO VIDEO L R VIDEO S VIDEO DTV/ CBL DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R Video in MONITOR OUT DTV/ CBL OPTICAL Video monitor IN VCR OUT DTV/CBL VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT R L R Audio in Audio out S V L S Video in DVD recorder or VCR Video out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. V VIDEO AUX VIDEO L V L AUDIO R R Audio out R Audio out L Video out 18 Game console or video camera CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components MD or CD recorder DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R O PREPARATION OPTICAL Audio out MD/CD-R L CD player R Coaxial out DVD CD DTV/CBL IN (PLAY) MD/ CD-R C OUT (REC) CD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT R R L L R Audio out L Audio in MD recorder or tape deck English 19 CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ Connecting the 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) TUNER AM ANT 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. GND 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 3 11 8 6 Cut the lead wire and remove it. Unit: mm Lead wire ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Clamp Insert wire into slot 5 2 20 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. Clamp CONNECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPONENTS Connecting the DAB antenna The DAB (Digital Audio Broadcast) wire antenna is included with this unit. In general, this wire should provide sufficient signal strength. Simply connect the wire antenna to the DAB antenna terminal and attach the wire antenna vertically in an unobtrusive location. Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. model ..............................................................1 outlet Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Indoor DAB antenna (included) ■ Memory back-up DAB DAB PREPARATION Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s) supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power (total power consumption of components), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 83. The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B It is recommended that you use TUNE AID (see page 48) when setting up the indoor DAB antenna in order to maximize DAB reception ability. Notes STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA STANDBY/ON • Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area – not all areas are presently covered. For a list of country DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, you can check WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org. • If the DAB signal is weak, use a commercially available outdoor DAB antenna for better reception. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SYSTEM POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK AMP START Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM Front panel English POWER STANDBY /ON or Remote control 21 BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The basic setup feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. 3 Press ENTER to enter BASIC SETUP. y • If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU (page 59) instead of using BASIC SETUP. • Initial settings are indicated in bold for each parameter. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Using the BASIC SETUP menu Before you begin: • Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control) to select the front speakers you want to use. • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. POWER TV AV STANDBY TV CH TV INPUT MD/CD-R TUNER DTV/CBL VCR ENTERTAIN 3 4 EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. SLEEP 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT V-AUX 9 0 10 MULTI CH IN REC MENU SRCH MODE ENTER CODE SET A/B/C/D/E 1 1 TITLE BAND AUDIO FREQ/TEXT EON AMP PTY SEEK A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY MODE ENT. SET MENU LEVEL DISC SKIP MOVIE 2 SELECT A SPEAKERS B DVD Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2 MUTE MUSIC 1 STANDARD DISPLAY 2,15 3-14 PRESET/CH START Press j / i to select the desired setting. ROOM: S M >L POWER STEREO CD 4 VOLUME TV VOL TV MUTE SYSTEM POWER The ROOM parameter appears in the front panel display. 5 Press d to display the SUBWOOFER parameter. Press AMP. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E AMP PRESET/CH 2 Press SET MENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 6 Press j / i to select the desired setting. SUBWOOFER ..YES SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 22 BASIC SETUP YES NONE If you have a subwoofer in your system. If you do not have a subwoofer in your system. BASIC SETUP 7 Press d to display the SPEAKERS parameter. 11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH PRESET/CH 8 Press j / i to select the number of speakers you connected. SPEAKERS ..6spk Choices 9 Display 2spk L C R SL SB SR 3spk L C R SL SB SR 4spk L C R SL SB SR 5spk L C R SL SB SR 6spk L C R SL SB SR CHECK:TestTone Speakers Front L/R CHECK: OK? Front L/R, Center 12 YES Press j / i to select the desired setting. Front L/R, Surround L/R CHECK: OK? YES Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R YES Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Press d to display SET/CANCEL. NO 13 To complete the setup process if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. To proceed to the SPEAKER LEVEL speaker level adjustment menu to balance the level of each speaker. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. ENTER A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH 10 PREPARATION If you selected SET, you hear a test tone from each speaker in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds, then “CHECK: OK?”. Press j / i to select the desired setting. A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH If you selected NO in step 12, the front speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. >SET CANCEL SET CANCEL To apply the settings you chose in steps 4 through 8. To cancel the setup without making any changes. English 23 BASIC SETUP ■ To balance the speaker levels Perform the following steps after step 13 (see page 23). VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A dB L C R SL SR The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker and the left front (or left surround) speaker in turn. The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes in the front panel display. 14 Press d / u to select a speaker, then use j / i to adjust the balance. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. FR ----||---Adjusts the balance between the front left and right speakers. C ----||---Adjusts the balance between the front left and center speakers. SL ----||---Adjusts the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. SB ----||---Adjusts the balance between the surround left and surround back speakers. SR ----||---Adjusts the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. SWFR ----||---Adjusts the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. 15 24 Press SET MENU to exit after balancing the speakers. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. RUNNING H/F 1 PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY EDIT CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT or PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT MULTI CH IN REC SILENT CINEMA AUDIO DISC SKIP Front panel 3 1 7 6 4 FREQ/RDS 1 EON POWER TV AV VCR PTY SEEK START TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. VOLUME DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SP A dB L R MUTE 4 DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC 5 6 7 3 DIRECT ST. 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT AUDIO A SPEAKERS B DISC SKIP 3,7 V-AUX VOLUME 6 POWER CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK 9 0 10 SET MENU LEVEL AMP START ENT. TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE Selected input source Input mode ENTER 1 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operating instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON BASIC OPERATION CD STANDBY The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display for a few seconds. AMP MODE SYSTEM POWER CODE SET Remote control or VOLUME Front panel Remote control or 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. SPEAKERS A B AMP or Front panel VOLUME Front panel Remote control A SPEAKERS B 9 0 Remote control English 25 PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons on the remote control) to select a sound field program. (See page 52 for details about sound field programs.) PROGRAM Front panel MUSIC ENTERTAIN PROGRAM MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 TONE CONTROL Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. MUTE STEREO You can adjust the tonal quality of your front left and right speakers or headphones (when connected). Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to increase or decrease. • Select TREBLE to adjust the high frequency response. • Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response. y or AMP ■ To adjust the tone 0 LEVEL 10 ENT. SET MENU Remote control ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective with the Direct Stereo program (page 30) or MULTI CH INPUT. • When TC BYPASS is set to AUTO (page 61), and BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses this unit’s tone control circuitry. ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when the Direct Stereo or 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 26 You can adjust the muting level (see page 61). MUTE PLAYBACK ■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. MULTI CH INPUT Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation MULTI CH IN or VOLUME PRESET/TUNING Front panel FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT Remote control MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA MULTI CH INPUT PROGRAM Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display. Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM BASIC OPERATION ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source, then select an audio source. VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TV Sports dB L R Program name CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX Audio sources Video sources MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET Note If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source, then press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). English 27 PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation MODE PTY SEEK ■ Enjoying multi-channel source If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. START VOLUME TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER MUTE STEREO DVD DTV/CBL TUNER VCR SLEEP V-AUX MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET 0 10 FREQ/TEXT SET MENU TITLE MENU EON AMP SRCH MODE ENTER A/B/C/D/E MODE PTY SEEK Sound field program buttons ENT. LEVEL BAND AMP MOVIE 1 STANDARD START A/B/C/D/E RETURN Press AMP on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then press EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback. DISPLAY EXTD SUR. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. AMP 7 To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly while PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed. MUTE AMP STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 0 10 MOVIE ENTER A/B/C/D/E ENT. A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL Program name Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1 channels. Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. Decoders (select with j / i) You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the software you are playing. VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TV Sports dB L R y Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. Off (OFF) Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels. 28 PLAYBACK When you select the SUR. STANDARD program: Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder manually (PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX). • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When “SUR. LR” (see page 59) or “SUR. B” (see page 59) is set to NONE. – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set to NONE (see page 59). ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. Neo: 6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. AMP STANDARD 5 Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER program. BASIC OPERATION Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER program: PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. MOVIE 4 Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. Neo: 6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. y You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. SELECT 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set to NONE (see page 59). English 29 PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (Direct Stereo) ■ Night listening modes Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2channel PCM and analog sources. The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control) to select “DIRECT STEREO”. Press AMP on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then press NIGHT repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. PROGRAM or AMP DIRECT ST. 8 NIGHT AMP 10 Front panel Remote control DIRECT STEREO Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 26) and SET MENU (page 57) settings are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. • If you press AMP on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then press DIRECT ST., the unit automatically enters Direct Stereo mode and you cannot toggle between the unit’s other sound field programs. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press j / i to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with the Direct Stereo program or MULTI CH INPUT. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 30 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. Selecting input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. 1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source. PROGRAM or INPUT STEREO AMP 1 Front panel Remote control 2 2ch Stereo y Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”. INPUT MODE BASIC OPERATION ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. VCR Input source STRAIGHT ENT. EFFECT Front panel Remote control DTS ANALOG STRAIGHT Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. LR” to NONE (see page 59), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note MD/CD-R TUNER CD dB R Input mode Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate decoder. y You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 62). Notes • When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set INPUT MODE to DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player depending on the player. English Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. LR” is set to NONE (see page 59) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – When you select a 2ch Stereo, 6ch Stereo, DIRECT STEREO or SUR. STANDARD as a sound field program. DVD L AUTO AMP or DTV/CBL VOLUME Press STRAIGHT (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT on the remote control) to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT V-AUX SP A 31 PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 Select the input source. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 2 CODE SET Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. STRAIGHT AMP then ENT. STRAIGHT 3 Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH 32 (Format) Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. in Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. RUNNING H/F 1 FM/AM TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 3 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E Lights up DISPLAY If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING AUTO AUTO/MAN'L ■ Automatic tuning LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING INPUT EDIT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SEARCH MODE 1 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R BASIC OPERATION 3 2 TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. 4 INPUT TUNER or Front panel 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. Remote control l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL Press FM/AM, DAB (or BAND on the remote control) to select the reception band. “FM”or “AM” appears in the front panel display. VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE BAND DAB Front panel Remote control When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. English 33 FM/AM TUNING ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM AUTO TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Disappears DISPLAY If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. 1 1 PRESET/TUNING 3 2 Press FM/AM, DAB to select the FM band. EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE FM DAB VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO SP A 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L Lights up DISPLAY If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R AUTO SP A 34 TUNER FM/AM TUNING 3 ■ Manually presetting stations Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT MEMORY SILENT CINEMA MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB L 1 R VCR DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED VOLUME dB L R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB L R Preset group English Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. DTV/CBL BASIC OPERATION You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT), then PRESET/CH l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward the lower frequencies. V-AUX SP A Notes Automatic preset tuning options: 2,5 Tune into a station. See page 33 for tuning instructions. When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. 4 35 FM/AM TUNING 4 Selecting preset stations Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. 1 2 l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO CD L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA TUNED MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB L R Preset number 9 0 10 5 A/B/C/D/E DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED 1 2 When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 VOLUME dB L DISPLAY PRESET/CH y CD MEMORY A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY V-AUX MENU SRCH MODE MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM SP A TITLE BAND ENTER Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. VCR ENT. SET MENU LEVEL R Press A/B/C/D/E (or A/B/C/D/E i on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. A/B/C/D/E 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. NEXT or ENTER A/B/C/D/E Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 36 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Front panel Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/ CH u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 l PRESET/TUNING h PRESET/TUNING LEVEL FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT or SEARCH MODE ENTER DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel PRESET/CH Remote control 2,4 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED SP A CD 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1”. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE Press and hold for more than 3 seconds VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL NEXT VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A English 37 FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD Receiving Radio Data System stations Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. SP A ■ PS (Program Service name) mode The name of the Radio Data System station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode There are 15 program types to classify Radio Data System stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music ■ RT (Radio Text) mode Information about the program (such as the title of the song or name of the singer) on the Radio Data System station being received is displayed using a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with an underbar (_). ■ CT (Clock Time) mode The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks) See “EON function” on page 41. 38 FM/AM TUNING Changing the Radio Data System mode Four modes are available for displaying Radio Data System data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that correspond to the Radio Data System data services offered by the station light up in the front panel display. 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to set this unit to tuner mode. TUNER 2 FREQ/TEXT • Do not press FREQ/TEXT until a Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has not finished receiving all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • Radio Data System data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • This unit cannot utilize the Radio Data System data source if the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other Radio Data System modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • Radio Data System data may not be received under poor reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this will change the reception mode to manual, Radio Data System data may be displayed when you change the display to Radio Data System mode. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of a Radio Data System station, the Radio Data System data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear in the front panel display. PS Remote control PTY BASIC OPERATION Press FREQ/TEXT repeatedly on the remote control to display the various Radio Data System data offered by the transmitting station. Notes RT CT Frequency display English 39 FM/AM TUNING PTY SEEK function 3 If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset Radio Data System stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. FREQ/TEXT EON MODE PTY SEEK TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset Radio Data System stations. The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while searching for stations. To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again. AMP 1,3 START VOLUME MODE PTY SEEK START STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 NIGHT 0 10 STRAIGHT ENT. SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY Remote control MOVIE 1 STANDARD LEVEL 2 DISPLAY PRESET/CH y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE again. MODE PTY SEEK START Remote control 2 POP M ENTER A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Remote control 40 Flashes Press PRESET/CH u / d to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E PTY HOLD Lights up MUTE • The unit stops searching when it finds a station broadcasting the selected type of program. • If the found station is not the one you desire, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes searching for another station broadcasting the same type of program. FM/AM TUNING ■ To cancel this function EON function This function uses the EON data service on the Radio Data System station network. If you select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset Radio Data System stations that are scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and switches from the station currently being received to the new station when the broadcast starts. Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is shown in the front panel display. MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT EON MODE PTY SEEK TV VOL TV CH 2 AMP START VOLUME y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. Note BASIC OPERATION This function can only be used when a Radio Data System station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel display. 1 Check that the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another Radio Data System station so that the EON indicator lights up. 2 Press EON repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears in the front panel display. EON Remote control • If a preset Radio Data System station type starts broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit automatically switches from the program being received to that program. (The EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the selected program ends, the unit returns to the previous station (or another program on the same station). English 41 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) About DAB Ensemble DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting), also known as digital radio, is a new way of radio broadcasting. DAB is broadcast using digital signals instead of analog signals, resulting in near CD-quality sound. Analog signals (i.e. AM/FM) are susceptible to interference (i.e. distortion and noise) caused by electrical equipment, weather conditions, tall buildings, mountains, etc.; digital signals are not. Thus, with DAB, there is virtually interference-free reception and no hiss or crackle. Another advantage of DAB is that a large amount of information can be carried within the digital signal. DAB is broadcast in blocks of data called ensembles (also known as multiplexes). Several radio programs (called services) can be broadcasted simultaneously in each ensemble. This means that you can choose between several radio programs within one frequency. In addition to the audio signal, service information is also broadcasted and displayed on this unit’s front panel display. Part of the service information is text data information called DLS (Dynamic Label Segment). For more information, see page 46. 42 Service Audio signal and service information With DAB, there is no need to remember channel frequencies, either. All broadcasts are selected by simply selecting the service name. Notes • Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area – not all areas are presently covered. For a list of country DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, you can check WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org. • The sound quality and service information are controlled by the DAB broadcaster, not this unit. Not all DAB broadcasters transmit PAD/SI information. • DAB signals are broadcast in Band-III (174 – 240 MHz) and L-Band (1.452 – 1.492 GHz). This unit is able to receive both bands. DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) DAB tuning 3 For DAB tuning, the user does not tune in by station frequency (like FM/AM), but tunes in via the channel label instead. There are five DAB tuning methods: ALPHANUMERIC, ACTIVE, ENSEMBLE, FAVOURITE and PRESET. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) (SEARCH MODE) (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) to switch between AUTO and PRESET. ALPHANUMERIC Important ACTIVE PRESET/TUNING EDIT Before tuning in to DAB services, it is necessary to do an initial scan (see “INIT SCAN” on page 47) to create a registry list of available ensembles and services in advance. SEARCH MODE ENSEMBLE or SET MENU FAVOURITE MENU SRCH MODE A/B/C/D/E VOLUME PRESET PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA PRESET PRESET 3 2 1 ■ Switching to DAB reception 1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. Automatic tuning type Result ALPHANUMERIC Browse through the all registered DAB services in numerical/alphabetical order (0-9, A-Z). ACTIVE Browse through all of the receivable DAB services in alphabetical order. ENSEMBLE Browse through the registered ensembles in the order of the channel label size from the smallest to the largest. INPUT or Front panel 2 Lights up TUNER FAVOURITE Remote control Press FM/AM, DAB (or BAND on the remote control) to select DAB. PRESET BASIC OPERATION When you select PRESET, the PRESET indicator lights up. DISPLAY PROGRAM Browse through the top 10 user-selected services. See page 45. FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE BAND DAB Front panel Remote control DAB indicator lights up, when receiving DAB broadcast signal. DAB 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/ CH u / d on the remote control) to search the registered service. To return to the top of the list, press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) (or PRESET/CH j / i on the remote control). l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL ENTER or Lights up Front panel A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH English Remote control 43 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) PRESET MEMORY 3a PRESET MEMORY mode is used to assign preset numbers to DAB services. 1 Tune in to the DAB service you would like to assign a preset number to. VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP AB DAB Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to browse through the assigned preset service numbers in the registry list. When not assigned, EMPTY appears next to the number. Continue pressing the button until the EMPTY appears. (You can also choose the assigned preset number. In this case, the previous service is replaced with the current service.) BBC Radio 4 l PRESET/TUNING h 2 LEVEL Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) (or MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five seconds. ENTER or Front panel A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Remote control 55 EMPTY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN Appears on the front panel display MEMORY Remote control 3b MEMORY Use the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter a preset number. For example, to assign the current service the number “56”: STANDARD 5 Flashes PRESET 5_ SELECT Note 6 There are two ways to select a preset service: either by using the PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) or the numeric buttons. PRESET 56 If the number entered already exists (i.e. already assigned to a service), then the previous service is replaced with the current service. 4 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) (or MEMORY on the remote control) to assign the indicated preset number to the current DAB service. The MEMORY indicator turns off. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel 44 RETURN MEMORY Remote control DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) ■ PRESET tuning With PRESET tuning, the users tunes in to DAB services by entering the user-assigned preset service number. 1 Switch to DAB reception and select PRESET as the tuning method, following steps 1 through 3 as described in “Switching to DAB reception” on page 43. 2c Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The numbers entered followed by the service assigned to those numbers appear on the front panel display for three seconds. ENTER A/B/C/D/E Note A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH There are two ways to select a preset service: either by using the PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) or the numeric buttons. VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP AB DAB 2a l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL ENTER or A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH Front panel Remote control VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED Appears for three seconds VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD BBC Radio 4 If there is no service assigned to the preset numbers entered, the numbers entered followed by “EMPTY” appears in the display screen for one second. The service currently being broadcasted is then displayed. For example, if the preset number “56” was not assigned to a service: VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SP AB 56 EMPTY Appears for three seconds VCR DTV/CBL TUNED DAB 56 BBC Radio 4 TUNER Appears for one second CD TUNED DAB V-AUX SP AB DAB TUNED SP AB DAB 56 BBC Radio 4 BASIC OPERATION Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET/ CH u / d on the remote control) to browse through the preset DAB services in the registry list. Only assigned preset numbers (along with its service) appear; unassigned preset numbers are skipped. SP AB VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED BBC Radio 4 DAB SP AB 50 BBC Radio 2 Current service being broadcasted 2b Use the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter a preset service number. For example, to select the preset service “56”: STANDARD 5 PRESET 5_ SELECT 6 PRESET 56 English Note For numbers less than 10, simply press “0” followed by the number. 45 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) DAB service information The DISPLAY key shows various information about the service currently being broadcasted. 1 While a service is currently being broadcasted, press DISPLAY. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY DISPLAY or Front panel Information Type Note Up to 14 characters can be displayed on the front panel display at one time. If there are more than 14 characters in the data text, the information being displayed will continuously scroll from left to right, one letter at a time. Service label Displays the name of the current service (maximum length of 16 letters). Remote control Each time DISPLAY is pressed, information about the service being broadcasted is displayed in the front panel. The service information is displayed in this order: Order Descriptions of the information types are listed below: Example 1 Service label Classic FM 2 DLS Classic FM on the internet... 3 Ensemble label Digital1 Network 4 Program type Classic Music 5 Date and time 05JUL05 10:50 6 Audio mode / bit rate Stereo 160Kbps 7 Channel label / frequency 11D 222.06MHz 8 Signal quality SignalQ.: 100 The information order starts from the beginning again after “signal quality” information has been displayed. DLS DLS stands for Dynamic Label Segment. Displays information about the program currently being broadcasted. The current song or program title, artist or speaker, or even what the next song or program will be may be displayed. This data is continuously updated by the DAB broadcaster, thus it often changes (with every new song or program). Other data, such as news, weather, and sports headlines may be broadcasted as well. Ensemble label Displays the name of the current ensemble (maximum length of 16 letters). Program type Displays the genre (song/program type) of the current service (maximum length of 16 characters). Date and time Displays the current date and time. This data is updated with each passing minute. Audio mode/bit rate Displays the audio mode and bit rate of the current service. Channel label/frequency Displays the current service's channel label and frequency. Signal quality Displays the signal strength (from 00 to 100) of the current service. A higher number means better reception. 46 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) Accessing DAB MENU INIT SCAN There are five operations in DAB MENU: INIT SCAN, TUNE AID, DRC MODE, PRUNE LIST, and PRESET DELETE. To access DAB MENU, perform the following: VOLUME TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 0 10 TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY 1 Note ENT. SET MENU LEVEL INIT SCAN locates all of the DAB ensembles and services in your area. When this operation is selected, the unit will scan the entire band (or both bands, if selected) and create a registry list of every receivable DAB ensemble and service. DISPLAY 1 2-5 This scan is necessary before the user can tune in to DAB services. It should be done during the initial setup of this unit. PRESET/CH Press SET MENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 1 SET MENU BASIC SETUP MENU A/B/C/D/E Press n. “MANUAL SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 2 Press ENTER. The INIT SCAN operations appear in the front panel display. MANUAL SETUP ENTER A/B/C/D/E A)INIT SCAN A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION 2 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1 through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB MENU” on this page. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. SCAN:FULL PRESET/CH 3 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP. 3 Press j / i to switch between the INIT SCAN operations. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Operation name PRESET/CH The SOUND MENU parameter appears in the front panel display. 4 Press n twice. “DAB MENU” appears in the front panel display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 3 DAB MENU SCAN:FULL Function Scans both Band III (174-240MHz in Europe; 218-223 MHz in the U.K.) and L-Band (1.47-1.49GHz) for DAB ensembles. Scans only Band III (174-240MHz in EUROPE model SCAN:BAND3 Europe; 218-223 MHz in the U.K.) for DAB ensembles. U.K. model SCAN:UK BAND3 SCAN:NO Cancels the scan mode. Returns to the DAB MENU. PRESET/CH 5 Press ENTER to access DAB MENU. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A)INIT SCAN English A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH INIT SCAN is one of the DAB MENU operations. 47 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) 4 Press ENTER to select an operation. The SCAN?[ENTER] verification message appears in the front panel display if a scan is selected. (The unit immediately returns to the DAB MENU if SCAN:NO is selected.) SCAN?[ENTER] ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH 5 TUNE AID Using TUNE AID, the strength of the DAB signal that the unit receives is indicated on the front panel display. TUNE AID is used to adjust the positioning of the DAB antenna and this unit, in order to discover which setup has the best reception state. It is recommended that you use TUNE AID when setting up this unit in order to maximize DAB reception ability. 1 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Access DAB MENU by following steps 1 through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB MENU” on page 47. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. A)INIT SCAN ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH The unit begins scanning the selected band(s) for DAB ensembles. • During the scan, “SCANNING“ appears in the front panel display. • When scanning has been completed, “FINISH” appears in the front panel display, followed by the number of receivable DAB services. “FINISH [###]” is displayed for three seconds. 2 Scanning xx% 3 Press n. “TUNE AID” appears in the front panel display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E B)TUNE AID PRESET/CH FINISH [015] Press ENTER. The signal strength level of the selected channel appears in the front panel display. The signal strength rating is from 00 (none) to 100 (best). (Example: if 15 services were found.) ENTER After three seconds, the unit returns to the INIT SCAN menu. A)INIT SCAN A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH 4 If the INIT SCAN operations are not successful, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display. FINISH [000] Press PRESET/CH j / i to switch to another channel label. The signal strength level of the new channel appears in the front panel display. For a list of DAB frequencies, see “DAB Frequency Table” on page 82. ENTER Not Available A/B/C/D/E y A/B/C/D/E 5B LEVEL: 40 PRESET/CH See the DAB section in TROUBLESHOOING for further details or proper remedies (page 76). If there are no preset DAB services, Initiate Scan or Not Available appears in the front panel display.In this time, press A/B/C/D/E (or PRESET u / d on the remote control) to start INIT SCAN automatically. 5 Press ENTER exit TUNE AID. The unit returns to the TUNE AID menu display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E y Scanning is performed with the scan mode set in the set menu. 48 5A LEVEL: 80 PRESET/CH B)TUNE AID DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) Dynamic Range Control 4 Dynamic range is the decibel (dB) range between the highest and lowest sounds in a broadcast. Some DAB broadcasters transmit a wide dynamic range (enabling high quality sound), accompanied by Dynamic Range Control (DRC) data. DRC can be used to compress the dynamic range of the broadcast, making softer sounds easier to hear. This is especially useful when listening to a DAB service in a noisy environment or at a low volume (such as at night). 1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1 through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB MENU” on page 47. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/CH j / i to switch between AUTO and OFF. DRC MODE: OFF or ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E DRC MODE: AUTO PRESET/CH Operation name DRC MODE: AUTO Does not utilize DRC data (if transmitted). The dynamic range of the DRC MODE: OFF signal is played in full, enabling high A)INIT SCAN sound quality. If DRC MODE: AUTO is set and the broadcast contains DRC data, then the DRC indicator lights up. Press n twice. “DRC MODE” appears in the front panel display. DRC Lights up ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E C)DRC MODE 5 PRESET/CH 3 Press ENTER. The DRC MODE option appears in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 2 Function Utilizes the DRC data (if transmitted). The dynamic range of the signal is compressed, enhancing the audio quality at low volumes or in a noisy environment. Press ENTER. The unit returns to the DRC MODE menu display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E C)DRC MODE PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E DRC MODE: OFF PRESET/CH English 49 DAB (DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING) PRUNE LIST PRESET DELETE PRUNE LIST (PRUNE LIST) is used to delete a group of inactive ensembles and services from the DAB registry list. Use PRESET DELETE to delete specific unnecessary services from the DAB registry list. 1 1 Access DAB MENU by following steps 1 through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB MENU” on page 47. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. Access DAB MENU by following steps 1 through 5 as described in “Accessing DAB MENU” on page 47. “INIT SCAN” appears in the front panel display. A)INIT SCAN A)INIT SCAN 2 2 Press n three times. “PRUNE LIST” appears in the front panel display. Press n four times. “PRESET DEL” appears in the front panel display. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E D)PRUNE LIST A/B/C/D/E E)PRESET DEL PRESET/CH PRESET/CH 3 3 Press ENTER. The “OK?[ENTER]” verification message appears in the front panel display. Press ENTER. “DELETE:--” appears in the front panel display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E OK?[ENTER] 4 DELETE:-- PRESET/CH 4 PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Unnecessary services are deleted from the registry list. Once this operation has been completed, “FINISH” appears in the front panel display for one second. Press l / h. Select the setting number of the service you wish to remove. Only preset number appears in the front panel display. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E DELETE:56 PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E FINISH PRESET/CH The unit returns to the PRUNE LIST menu display. D)PRUNE LIST 5 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The selected service is deleted from the registry list. When this operation has been completed, “DELETE OK” appears in the front panel display for one second. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E DELETE OK PRESET/CH The unit returns to the PRESET DELETE menu display. E)PRESET DEL 50 RUNNING H/F 1 RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1 2 SYSTEM POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX 1 MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK AMP START If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX or MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Front panel • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SP LEVEL” (page 60) and the sound field programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. You can only record analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output on VCR OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. BASIC OPERATION 2 POWER Notes CODE SET Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. English 51 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 31) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 27 to 31. Remote control button Features 1 STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources as is. 2 MUSIC: Pop/Rock This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT: TV Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce sound field. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 52 Program Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Remote control button Program MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 5 Features Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS English 53 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 27 to 31. Remote control button 1 2 3 5 54 Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2-channel (left and right) playback. STEREO: 6ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC: Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC: The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. MUSIC: The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. Sources 2-CH MULTI 2-CH ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer POWER TV AV STANDBY CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX SLEEP OFF The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. POWER DVD SLEEP y SYSTEM POWER Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. 2 MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK AMP START 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD SLEEP 60min MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A HiFi DSP ADVANCED OPERATION SLEEP OFF SLEEP VOLUME SLEEP dB L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. SLEEP indicator VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A TV Sports VOLUME SLEEP dB L R English 55 ADVANCED OPERATIONS Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22) and “SP LEVEL” (page 60). FREQ/TEXT EON MODE PTY SEEK TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT AMP START 1 VOLUME MUTE STEREO MUSIC MOVIE 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 2 ENTERTAIN 1 0 10 ENT. SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH 4 3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR. R SUR. B SUR. L SWFR Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 4 Press ENTER when you have completed your adjustment. y This operation can also be performed using the controls on the front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level. 56 SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ BASIC SETUP Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 22). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to adjust speaker and system settings manually. 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 59 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 60 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 60 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 60 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 60 F)D. RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 61 G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 61 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode. Features Page A)I/O ASSIGN Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 61 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 62 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 62 ADVANCED OPERATION Item 3 DAB MENU Use to adjust the DAB tuner parameters and ensemble/service registry list. Item Features Page This menu is the initial scan to receive each service in DAB. This scan is necessary before the user can tune in to DAB services. 62 B>TUNE AID Check the signal strength of initial setting in DAB. 62 C>DRC MENU Use to enjoy strong sound such as at night, etc. 62 D>PRUNE LIST Use to delete a group of inactive ensemble and services from the DAB registry list. 62 E>PRESET DEL Use to delete specific unnecessary services from the DAB registry list. 62 English A>INIT SCAN 57 SET MENU 4 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. Item Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display. 63 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 63 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 63 D)MULTI ZONE Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 63 5 Using SET MENU Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. FREQ/TEXT MODE EON PTY SEEK AMP START 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 1 VOLUME TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT 3 DAB MENU MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT A SPEAKERS B 9 Press u / d to display the desired menu. 0 10 ENT. LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 4 OPTION MENU 2,8 ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH 3-7 6 Press ENTER to enter the displayed menu. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items you want to adjust. To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. 7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the submenu, then press u / d to select the item and j / i to change the parameter. Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting. To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. 8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. y You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press u / d to display MANUAL SETUP. MANUAL SETUP 4 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP. 1 SOUND MENU appears in the front panel display. 1 SOUND MENU 58 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT Choices: LARGE, SMALL • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. Center speaker CENTER Choices: LRG, SML, NONE • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. Bass out BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set the front speakers to SML). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. Cross over CrossOver Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer. Choices: NRM (normal), REV (reverse) • Select NRM if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REV to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. ADVANCED OPERATION Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR Choices: LRG, SML, NONE • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 31) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SUR. B) to NONE. Surround back speaker SUR. B Choices: LRG, SML, NONE • Select LRG if you have a large surround back speaker. • Select SML if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. English 59 SET MENU ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the level of each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 59). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB • FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. • FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. • C adjusts the balance of the center speaker. • SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. • SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speaker. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SUR. B adjusts the distance of the surround back speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m 60 Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz Choices: –6 to +6 dB • Select ON to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the currently selected source component. Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB Speaker SP LFE Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HP LFE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the “LFE LEVEL” setting, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) Speaker SP D.R Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone HP D.R Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. Muting type MUTE TYP. Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 ms Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode. ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGN You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (C.V[A]) and B (C.V[B]) Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OUT(1)) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 (IN (2)), 3 (IN (3)), 4 (IN (4)) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR (4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 (IN (5)) Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ADVANCED OPERATION Tone bypass TC.BYPASS Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when TREBLE and BASS (page 26) are set to 0 dB. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. 2 INPUT MENU English 61 SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button will not be recalled. ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press u / d to select the character you want, then use j / i to move to the next space. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.). 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. 62 3 DAB MENU Use to adjust the DAB tuner parameters and ensemble/ service registry list. ■ Init scan A)INIT SCAN Use this feature to locate all the DAB broadcasts in your area. The unit scans the entire band (or both bands, if selected) and creates a registry list of every receivable ensemble and service. Choices: SCAN:FULL, SCAN:BAND3 ■ Tune Aid B)TUNE AID Use this feature to determine the signal strength level of a selected ensemble. This allows the user to discover the best setup/placement for optimum DAB reception. ■ DRC mode C)DRC MODE Use this feature to compress the dynamic range of the DAB broadcast, making softer sounds easier to hear. This is especially useful when listening to a DAB service in a noisy environment or at night. Choices: DRC MODE: AUTO, DRC MODE: OFF ■ Prune list D)PRUNE LIST Use this feature to delete all of the inactive ensembles from the DAB registry list. ■ Preset delete E)PRESET DELETE Use this feature to delete specific unnecessary services from the DAB registry list. SET MENU 4 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: ON, OFF Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STANDARD ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Notes ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. English 63 ADVANCED SETUP MENU ADVANCED SETUP MENU The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front panel display. 2 y • During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted. • During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h buttons on the front panel are available for operation. Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select the item you want to set up. See the end of this section for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM CAUTION Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit to play back audio or video signals. 3 VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY STRAIGHT NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to toggle between the available parameters. INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,4 1 4 1,3 2 While this unit is in standby mode, hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT 64 While holding down, press STANDBY /ON Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. STANDBY /ON This completes the advanced setup procedure. The settings you made are reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. ADVANCED SETUP MENU ■ ADVANCED SETUP menu items Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit. Choices: 8 Ω MIN, 4 Ω MIN • Select 8 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select 4 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Front 4 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back Front 8 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ADVANCED OPERATION Factory presets PRESET Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see page 78). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. • Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. Note This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item parameters. English 65 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate the AMP mode. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT Press AMP to control this unit. MODE EON PTY SEEK TV VOL TV MUTE AMP START VOLUME TV CH The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, MULTI CH IN, VOLUME +/–, MUTE and input selector buttons) function in any mode. ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button. SYSTEM POWER The input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. CD TV MD/CD-R AV TUNER SLEEP DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX ENTERTAIN 3 4 EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. EON 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT 6 0 10 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY PRESET/CH START PTY SEEK TV MUTE TV CH TV INPUT TV MUTE STEREO Component control area You can control up to 6 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 67). STANDARD 5 TV INPUT MUSIC 3 6 9 TITLE MOVIE 4 MUSIC 1 SELECT STANDARD MUTE ENTERTAIN 2 STEREO ENTERTAIN 2 SUR. EXTD 7 SELECT 5B A SPEAKERS LEVEL START VOLUME TV CH TV VOL ENT. LEVEL RETURN 0 10 A SPEAKERS B 4 8 EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 7 STRAIGHT ENT. NIGHT 0 MENU ENTER ENT. SET MENU A/B/C/D/E TITLE 8 STRAIGHT 10 SET MENU LEVEL BAND MOVIE 3 ST. DIRECT 6 NIGHT 9 MENU SRCH MODE ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURNPRESET/CH MEMORY 66 AMP EON PTY SEEK MODE TV VOL 1 MEMORY CODE SET AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS MOVIE 2 SELECT A SPEAKERS B AUDIO REC FREQ/TEXT 1 5 MULTI CH IN REC MODE STANDARD 9 POWER DVD TV INPUT MUSIC POWER STANDBY POWER AV POWER DISC SKIP MUTE STEREO TV PRESET/CH DISPLAY REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. While holding down CODE SET, press an input selector button to select the component you want to set up. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each area. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT Remote Control Code Default Settings Input area Component category (Library) Manufacturer Default YAMAHA code CD CD YAMAHA 199 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 499 TUNER*1 TUNER YAMAHA fixed DVD DVD YAMAHA 699 DTV/CBL*2 – – – V-AUX – – – VCR – – – *1 You have control only over this unit and other YAMAHA tuners. *2 You must set TV remote control codes at the DTV/CBL button (other remote control codes can be set at any input selector button except DTV/CBL). EON AMP Note You must press and hold CODE SET throughout this procedure. 2 With CODE SET depressed, use the numeric buttons to enter the three-digit remote control code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. To reset the code, enter the default code for each component shown in the previous table. MULTI CH IN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT EON AMP Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s). MODE PTY SEEK START TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 VOLUME MUTE 9 0 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT 10 ADVANCED OPERATION A SPEAKERS B MOVIE ENT. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • You can only assign one remote control code to each input selector button. English 67 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 POWER TV AV MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX AUDIO 5 *1 MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 MUTE DISC SKIP CODE SET FREQ/TEXT EON PTY SEEK TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT AMP 68 8 STRAIGHT 0 10 ENT. LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND A B C ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH D START VOLUME MUTE Digital TV/ Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Disc Skip Rec (MD) Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Search backward w Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 Search backward PTY SEEK MODE f Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward PTY SEEK START AUDIO Audio e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward FRQ/TEXT a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward EON Stop Stop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop TV VOL + TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV VOL – TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV CH + TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV CH – TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TITLE Title PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up (1-8) PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Preset down (1-8) j Left i Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Select RETURN Return TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) ENT. Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV/CBL. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the remote control code is set in VCR. *2 DIRECT ST. 7 NIGHT VCR s 9 0 A B C D TV INPUT 1 DVD player/ DVD recorder p 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 TV MUTE STEREO A SPEAKERS B MULTI CH IN REC 4 5 POWER CD MODE 4 STANDBY 9 3 1 2 3 6 SYSTEM POWER EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. POWER TV AV STANDBY TV CH TV INPUT MUTE POWER MUSIC STEREO ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 6 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP 5 DVD DTV/CBL VCR V-AUX 9 0 10 ENT. SET MENU LEVEL MULTI CH IN REC TITLE 1 MENU SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO DISC SKIP A/B/C/D/E EON AMP PTY SEEK A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY PRESET/CH MEMORY MODE 3,4 ENTER CODE SET FREQ/TEXT 2 MOVIE 1 STANDARD A SPEAKERS B START 1 Press AMP. 2 Select the sound field program you want to adjust. AMP MUTE Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. VOLUME TV VOL TV MUTE SYSTEM POWER STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 LEVEL 3 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT 10 ENT. SET MENU Press u / d to select the parameters. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH 4 Press j / i to change the parameter value. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH y If you press and hold j / i to change the parameter value, the front panel display automatically stops at the factory preset parameter momentarily. English 69 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary to change other program parameters. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 63). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory presets Use PARAM. INI (see page 63). 70 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB to +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the reflection face. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 msec Source Sound Delay Time Delay Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Delay Time Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms For 2ch Stereo: ■ DIRECT (Direct) Function: Choices: Bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors for pure high fidelity sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. The AUTO setting is effective when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB while the night listening mode is set to OFF. AUTO, OFF Notes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • When “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, or “FRONT” set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” set to SWFR, front left and right speaker lowfrequency signals are redirected to the subwoofer. English 71 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For 6ch Stereo: Function: Control range: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. 0 to 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music: ■ PANORAMA (Panorama) Function: Choices: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF, ON ■ DIMENSION (Dimension) Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers) 3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR. STANDARD is selected. For DTS Neo:6 Music: ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 to 1.0 0.3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR. STANDARD is selected. 72 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 65 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 15-21 The input mode is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 31 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) or the input selector buttons. 25 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 25 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation button of this unit to resume audio output, then adjust the volume. 26 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — 11-13 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 73 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 65 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 26 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 60 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on. 31 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. No sound from the center speaker. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 60 “CENTER” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 59 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 6ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 60 “SUR. LR” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 59 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — “SUR. LR” in SET MENU is set to NONE. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, the surround back speaker setting is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround speakers. 59 “SUR. B” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 59 “BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 59 “BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 59 The sound suddenly goes off. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speaker. No sound from the subwoofer. The source does not contain low bass signals. 74 27, 52 27, 52 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 15-19 15-19 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 63 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. English 75 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem AM DAB 76 Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 20 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 20 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 34 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — Cannot tune in to any DAB stations. The INIT SCAN wasn’t performed, or the DAB registry list needs to be updated. Perform the INIT SCAN. 47 There may be no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. — The DAB signal is too weak. Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna. 21 The INIT SCAN operations are not successful and “Not Available” appears in the front panel display. The DAB antenna may not be connected. Make sure to the DAB antenna is firmly connected. 21 The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality DAB outdoor antenna. 21 The service reception is weak. The positioning of the indoor DAB antenna and/or the unit isn’t optimal for DAB reception. Use TUNE AID to locate the best DAB antenna and unit positioning for optimal DAB reception. 48 The DAB signal is too weak. Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna. 21 There is noise interference (e.g. hiss or crackle) The indoor DAB antenna needs to be repositioned. Readjust the position of the indoor DAB antenna. 21 The DAB signal is too weak. Use a high-quality outdoor DAB antenna. The service information does not appear or is inaccurate. The service may be temporarily out of order or isn’t provided by the DAB broadcasting company. Contact the DAB broadcasting company. FM stereo reception is noisy. FM Cause 42 There is no DAB service in your area. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 67 Try to set another code for the same remote control using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 67 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 77 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign and tuner presets. 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. Be sure this unit is in standby mode. STANDBY /ON VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY NEXT SEARCH MODE DAB DISPLAY PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,4 1 1,3 2 While this unit is in standby mode, hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and press STANDBY/ON. The ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON y To cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON. 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select “PRESET”. PROGRAM 3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the desired setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT RESET CANCEL 78 To reset the unit to its factory presets. To cancel without making any changes. If you selected “RESET”, the unit is reset to its factory presets and switches to standby mode. If you selected “CANCEL”, the unit switches to standby mode and nothing is reset. GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies (for 2-channel sources only) and a Game mode for games. Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround English 79 GLOSSARY Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 80 Audio information ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. GLOSSARY Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 81 GLOSSARY DAB Frequency Table Band III Frequency Channel label Frequency Channel label 174.928 MHz 5A 230.784 MHz 13A 176.640 MHz 5B 232.496 MHz 13B 178.352 MHz 5C 234.208 MHz 13C 180.064 MHz 5D 235.776 MHz 13D 181.936 MHz 6A 237.488 MHz 13E 183.648 MHz 6B 239.200 MHz 13F 185.360 MHz 6C 187.072 MHz 6D 188.928 MHz 7A Frequency Channel label 190.640 MHz 7B 1452.960 MHz LA 192.352 MHz 7C 1454.672 MHz LB 194.064 MHz 7D 1456.384 MHz LC 195.936 MHz 8A 1458.096 MHz LD 197.648 MHz 8B 1459.808 MHz LE 199.360 MHz 8C 1461.520 MHz LF 201.072 MHz 8D 1463.232 MHz LG 202.928 MHz 9A 1464.944 MHz LH 204.640 MHz 9B 1466.656 MHz LI 206.352 MHz 9C 1468.368 MHz LJ 208.064 MHz 9D 1470.080 MHz LK 209.936 MHz 10A 1471.792 MHz LL 211.648 MHz 10B 1473.504 MHz LM 213.360 MHz 10C 1475.216 MHz LN 215.072 MHz 10D 1476.928 MHz LO 216.928 MHz 11A 1478.640 MHz LP 218.640 MHz 11B 1480.352 MHz LQ 220.352 MHz 11C 1482.064 MHz LR 222.064 MHz 11D 1483.776 MHz LS 223.936 MHz 12A 1485.488 MHz LT 225.648 MHz 12B 1487.200 MHz LU 227.360 MHz 12C 1488.912 MHz LV 229.072 MHz 12D 1490.624 MHz LW 82 L-Band SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 85 W • Tuning Range ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 115/150/185/230 W • Maximum Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................130 W • IEC Output Power 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................95 W • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 120 or more AM SECTION • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω)................................ 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Tuning Range ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz DAB SECTION • Tuning Range (Band III) ............................................................. 174 to 240 MHz (L-Band) .......................................................... 1452 to 1492 MHz • Sensitivity (Band III)........................................................................... -99 dBm (L-Band)........................................................................... -95 dBm • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 97 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Stereo Separation 1 kHz........................................................... 95dB • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ..................................................................... PAL • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • Total Harmonic Distortion .................................................... 0.005% • Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to20 kHz/ +0.5/-0.5 dB GENERAL • Power Supply ........................................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption .............................................................. 360 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [U.K. models] ............................. 1 (Total 100 W max 0.4 A max) [Europe models] ........................... 2 (Total 50 W max 0.2 A max) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 416 mm • Weight ..................................................................................... 11 kg • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 83 LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES TV Admiral Aiwa Akai Alba AOC Bell&Howell Bestar Blaupunkt Blue sky Brandt Brocsonic Bush Clatronic Craig Croslex Curtis Mathis Daewoo 292, 293 294, 276, 283, 284 295, 296 296 297 292 298 229, 222 298 223 297 296 298 224 225 297, 226 297, 298, 224, 227, 228 Daytron 239 Dual 298 Dwin 293 Emerson 297, 224, 239, 232 Ferguson 223, 265, 266 First line 298 Funai 277, 278 Fisher 295, 233 Fraba 298 GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 LG/Goldstar 297, 298, 239, 237 Goodmans 296, 298, 223 Grundig 229, 238, 249 Hitachi 297, 239, 242, 243, 285 ICE 296 Irradio 296 Itt/Nokia 244, 245 JC Penny 293, 297, 234, 237 JVC 296, 246, 247, 286 Kendo 298 KTV 297, 239 Loewe 298, 248 LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233 Magnavox 297, 225, 239 Marantz 298 Matsui 295 Memorex 297 Mitsubishi 299, 297, 259, 287 NEC 297, 252, 282 Nokia 244, 245 Nokia Oceanic 245 Nordmende 265, 266 Onwa 296 Panasonic 234, 235, 236, 253, 288, 211 Philco 297, 225, 239 Philips 225 Pioneer Portland Proscan Proton Quasar Radio Shack RCA SABA Sampo Samsung Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Siemens Signature Sony Sylvania Telefunken Thomson Toshiba Videch Wards Yamaha 226, 235, 254, 255, 268 297, 256 293 297 234, 235 299, 293, 297 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258 223, 269, 265, 266 297 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 296 297 292, 239, 232, 213, 216 229 292 263, 214 297, 225 269, 264, 265, 266 223, 266 292, 226, 267, 215 297, 242 297, 239, 232 299, 292, 253, 242 VCR Admiral 395 Aiwa 396, 397, 398, 329 Akai 322, 323, 324 Audio Dynamic 392, 394 Bell&Howell 393 Blaupunkt 325, 326 Brocsonic 327 Bush 322 Canon 325, 328 CGM 396, 332 Citizen 396 Craig 396, 363 Curtis Mathis 397, 328, 333 Daewoo 328, 334, 335 DBX 392, 394 Dimensia 333 Dynatech 397 Emerson 327, 334, 396, 397 Fisher 393, 336 Funai 397 GE 328, 333, 387 Go Video 353 LG/Goldstar 396, 388 Goodmans 334, 337 Grundig 332, 338 Hitachi 325, 333, 349, 342, 343 Instant Replay 325, 328 Itt/Nokia 393 JC Penny 392, 393, 394, 328, 333, 349, 396, 363 JVC 392, 394, 344, 345, 346, 347 Kendo 396 Kenwood 392, 394, 396 Loewe 396, 337 Luxor 395 LXI 393, 396, 397, 336, 349 Magnavox 325, 326, 328 Marantz 392, 394 Marta 396 Matsui 396 Memorex 328, 336, 396, 397 Minolta 333, 349 Mitsubishi 399, 344, 348, 359, 352, 353 MTC 363, 397 Multitech 397, 348, 354 NEC 392, 394, 344, 383 Nokia 393, 395 Nokia Oceanic 395 Okano 323 Olympic 325, 328 Orion 327 Panasonic 325, 328, 355, 378, 384, 385, 386 Pentax 333, 349 Philco 325, 328, 397 Philips 325, 326, 328, 337, 356, 357 Phonola 337 Pilot 396 Pioneer 325 Quasar 325, 328 RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326, 328, 333, 335, 349, 358, 369, 363, 397 Realistic 393, 397, 328, 336, 359, 362, 396, 363 Samsung 354, 358, 363, 364, 365, 366 Sansui 394 Sanyo 393, 336, 367 Schneider 337 Scott 399, 335, 336, 348, 359, 352, 354, 358 Seleco 322 Sharp 395, 362, 382 Siemens 393 Signature 2000 395, 397 Sony 368, 379, 372, 373, 374, 375 Sylvania 397, 325, 326, 328 Symphonic 397 Tandberg 334 Tandy 397 Tashiro Tatung Teac Technics Teknika Telefunken Thomas Thorn Toshiba Totevison Unitech Universum Videosonic W.WHouse Wards Yamaha Zenith 396 392, 394 392, 394, 397 325, 328 396 376, 377 397 393, 396 335, 369, 389 363, 396 363 396, 327, 376 363 396 395, 396, 336, 362 399, 392, 393, 394 344, 368, 379, 396, 397 DVD player DENON 623, 624 Funai 625 HITACHI 626 JVC 627 KENWOOD 628 Mitsubishi 629 Onkyo 632, 633, 634 Panasonic 623, 635 Philips 699, 647 Pioneer 636, 637, 638 RCA 639 Samsung 642 Sharp 643 Sony 644 Toshiba 634 LG/GOLD STAR 645 THOMSON 646 Yamaha 699, 622, 623 CD player Yamaha 199 CD recorder Yamaha 499 MD recorder Yamaha 599 G RX-V100D © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG22480 RX-V100D AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88

Yamaha RX-V100D de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding